(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Genicom 5000 Series Full Manual"


GENICOM Confidential 

Duplication Prohibited 

Without Written Authorization 




GEK-99043 



FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (USA) 



This equipment complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is 
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause 
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation, 
f this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or 
elevision reception, which can be determined by turning the 
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the 
interference by one or more of the following measures: 

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from 
that to which the receiver is connected. 

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for 
help. 

FCC warning: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by 
he party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority 
o operate the equipment. 

Note the following: 

The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced 
device is prohibited. 

The length of the parallel interface cable must be 3 meters (10 
feet) or less. 

The length of the serial interface cable must be 15 meters (50 feet) 
or less. 

The length of the power cord must be 3 meters (10 feet) or less. 



COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (CANADA) 



This digital apparatus is in conformity with standard NMB-003 of 
Canada. 

Cet appareil numerique est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du 
Canada. 



COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (GERMANY) 

Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs 
Hermit wird bescheinigt, da£ der/die/das 



Machinenlarminformationsverordnung 3. GSGV, 18.01.1991: Der 
hochste 

Schalldruckpegel betragt 70 dB (A) oder weniger gemaft EN27779- 
1991. 



GEK-99044 



Preface 



COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (EUROPE) 

Warning 



This product meets the interference requirements of EN55022. 

In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio 

interference in which case, the user may be required to take 

adequate measures. 



Optional Interface Kits 



If either of the Ethernet interface board, Token ring interface board, 
IBM TX/CX interface board, or any variation of the Legacy parallel 
board is installed in either or both of the interface expansion slots, 
this equipment may produce additional radio frequency interference 
in compliance with FCC Class A emissions. 

Si des panneaux d'interface d'Ethernet, panneau de token ring, 
panneau d'IBM TX/CX, ou n'importe quelle variation des panneaux 
de parallele de legs est installe dans Tun ou l'autre ou tous les deux 
emplacements d'interface, ce material peut produire l'interference 
F.R. upplementaire conformement ICES-003 aux emissions de la 
classe A. 

Falls Ethernet, Token ring, IBM TX/CX, Schnittstellenkarten oder 
eine variation der herkoemmlicken Parallelscnittstellenkarten 
(interface) in einer oder beiden steckbaren Erweiterungsschnittstellen 
installiert sind, koennen moeglicherweise zusaetzliche 
Funkfrequenzstoerungen erzeugt werden, unter Einhaltung der 
EN55022 Klasse A Stoerstrahlungswerte. 



ENERGY STAR 



As an ENERGY STAR ® Partner, GENICOM has determined that this 
product meets the ENERGY STAR ® guidelines for energy efficiency. 
The International ENERGY STAR ® Office Equipment Program is an 
international program that promotes energy saving through the use 
of computers and other office equipment. The program backs the 
development and dissemination of products with functions that 
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which 
business proprietors can participate voluntarily. The targeted 
products are office equipment such as computers, displays, printers, 
facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among 
participating nations. 



INTERNATIONAL COMPLIANCE 



cc 



EN5008-1:1993 EN55022:1994 
EN50082-1:1997 EN61000-4-2:1995 
EN61000-4-3:1994 
EN61000-4-4:1995 
EN61000-4-5:1995 
EN61000-4-6:1994 



5000 Series User's Manual " GEK-99044 



Trademark Acknowledgements 



GENICOM is a registered trademark of GENICOM Corporation. The 
following companies own the other trademarks used in this manual: 

GENICOM Corporation: Centronics; 

International Business Machines Corporation: IBM; 

Epson Corporation: Epson; 

All other product names mentioned in this manual may also be 
trademarks of their respective companies. 



GEK-99044 iii Preface 



Operating Precautions 



Read this section and remember these instructions to ensure user 
safety and the printer's correct performance. Follow the cautions and 
notices labeled on the printer or marked in the manual. Save this 
manual for future reference. 

■ Use only the power cord furnished with the printer and a properly 
grounded outlet. Do not use an extension power cord. 

■ Confirm that the rated voltage of the printer matches the voltage 
of the power outlet where the printer will be connected. 

■ The maximum wattage of these printers is as follows: 

Model 5050 printer: 400 watts. 
Model 5100 printer: 524 watts. 
Model 5180 printer: 1167 watts. 

■ Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord before 
beginning maintenance. 

■ Disconnect the power cord from the outlet when the printer is not 
used over an extended period of time. 

■ Disconnect the power cord from the outlet whenever 
thunderstorms are nearby. Leaving the power cord connected 
may damage the printer or other property. 

■ Do not put the printer in direct sunlight, near a heater, or near 
water. Leave adequate space around the printer. 

■ Use only a shielded interface cable 3 meters (10 feet) or less for 
the parallel interface, 15 meters (50 feet) or less for the serial 
interface, 100 meters (328 feet) or less for Ethernet interface 
lOBase-T connection, and 185 meters (607 feet) or less for the 
Ethernet interface 10Base-2 connection. 

Be sure the printer is turned off before connecting any interface. 

Do not turn the printer off while it is printing. 

Do not disassemble or remove any components unless instructed 
in the maintenance procedures. 

Keep the printer unit upright when removing or installing it. 

Do not drop small objects, such as paper clips, into the printer. 

Do not set page margins off the physically printable page area. 

Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord immediately if 
an abnormal condition occurs: for instance, if the printer emits 
smoke, prints abnormally, becomes wet, or falls. For additional 
information, contact the GENICOM authorized dealer, where the 
printer was purchased. 



5000 Series User's Manual lv GEK-99044 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 



FCCCOMPTIANCF STATEMENT riTSA^ __i 
















Compliance statement (Canada) i 




COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (GERMANY) i 




COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (EUROPE) 


ii 




Pt 


itional Interface Kits 


ii 






Energy Star 


ii 


International compliance 


n 




Trademark Acknowledgements 


Hi 




Ol 


aerating Precautions 


iv 














TABLE OF CONTENTS 


V 




CHAP 


rERl. INTRODUCTION 


1-1 














Reference us age: 


1-2 




Org, 


\NIZATION OF THIS MANUAL 


1-2 














CHAPTER 2. GETTING STARTED...................................................................... 


2-1 










Preparing the Printer for Operation 


2-1 




Connecting the Power Cord 


2-1 




CONl 


^ecting the Interface Cable 


2-2 










pO Interface Card Options available 


2-3 


Description of the Control Panel 


2-3 




Beeper 


2-4 




Display 


2-5 






Pushbuttons 


2-5 


Opee 


jvtion of the Control Panel 


2-5 






\Data Entry 


2-6 




Installing the Paper Handling System 


2-8 




(55 OR 60 DBA CABINET MODELS) 


2-8 




\Paper Handling Aids (55 dBa) Cabinet Models 


2-77 




Selecting the Paper Path 


2-11 




5050 


/5100 (55 and 60 dBa) CABINET Model Only 


2-11 










Wire Paper Guide 


2-72 


Loading Paper 


2-14 




Manual Paper Loading 


2-74 


Semiautomatic Paper Loading 


2-18 




Horizontal Positioning of the Paper 


2-19 




The] 


Ribbon Deck 


2-20 










5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) cabinetmodel 


2-20 




The Ribbon Deck 


2-21 




5180 (52 OR 55 dBa) Cabinetmodel 


2-21 




the Ribbon Cartridge 


2-22 




5050/5100 (50,55 or 60 dBa) Cabinetmodel 


2-22 




RIBB< 


3N removal and Installation 


2-22 










5050/5100 (50,55 OR 60 dBa) CABINETMODEL 


2-22 




Removing a Ribbon (50,55, or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model 


2-25 




ribbon removal and Installation 


2-25 




5 180 (52 OR 55 DBA) cabinet MODEL 


2-25 




Setting the Print Gap 


2-27 




Reading the Scale 


2-27 












Using the White Scale 


2-27 






Using the Black Scale 


2-28 


Paper Tension Adjustment 


2-28 







GEK-99044 v Table of Contents 



Power-On Sequence 2-29 



Interlock circuit 2-29 



5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model 2-30 



5180 (55 dBa) Model 2-31 



Top Access Door Interlock Switch 2-31 



Print Module Access Panel AC Interlock Switch 2-31 



Initializing the Printer 2-32 



When to Initialize 2-32 



U sing the Keypad to Initialize 2-32 

\Control Panel Initialization 2-32 



TEST PATTERN PRINTING 2-33 



CHAPTER 3. OPERATING THE PRINTER 3-1 



Printer operational Modes 3-1 



Online 3-1 



Offline 3-1 



Fault 3-1 



Menu 3-1 

|Status Display 3-1 



Main Menu 3-2 



Operator Menu 3-2 



Setup Menu 3-2 



Maintenance Menu 3-2 



Menu Control 3-3 

ISetting up a Format 3-3 



Active Format 3-3 



Setting up an Active Format 3-4 



Form Length 3-4 



Top Margin 3-4 



Bottom Margin 3-4 



Top Print Ref 3-4 



Explanation of the Top Print Ref 3-5 



Example 3-5 



Low Paper Printing 3-7 



Low Paper 3-7 



Replenishing Paper Supply 3-7 



Setting top of form 3-8 



Paper Tear-Off Feature 3-9 



Paper Path (5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model Only) 3-9 



Number of Forms Ejected 3-9 



Special Forms 3-10 



Local Auto View Feature 3-12 



Viewing 3-12 



Retracting 3-12 



Using the menu control Menu 3-12 



CHAPTER 4. USING THE OPERATOR MENU 4-1 



NewRtrron 


4-1 








Select Format 


4-1 


Font Style 


4-2 


Char Set/Country 


4-3 




Character Set 


4-3 




Country 


4-4 


P 


lectCPI 


4-4 






\Select CPI (User Set) 


4-4 


g 


lectLPI 


4-5 







5000 Series User's Manual Vl GEK-99044 





Select LPI (User Set) 


4-5 


Interface 


4-6 


Emulation 


4-6 


Filter 


4-7 




Serial 


4-7 




Parallel(1284) 


4-8 




Expansion 1 /Expansion! 


4-9 


^HOW 


4-9 




Software IDs 


4-10 




Sample Status Page 


4-11 




Sample Format Page 


4-14 




Sample Character Set 


4-15 




Sample Font Page 


4-15 


Adjust TOF 


4-17 




Print At TOF 


4-17 




Set TOF. 


4-18 




Rolling ASCII 


4-18 


Di 


scard Job 


4-18 







CHAPTER 5. USING THE SET UP MENU 5-1 



Format 


5-1 


Modifv Format 


5-2 












Format Name 


5-2 




Fo 


nt Style 


5-2 










CharSet/Country.......................................................................... 


5-3 






Character Set 


5-3 


Country 


5-3 




CPI 


5-4 




LPI 


5-4 




Form Length 


5-5 




Top Margin 


5-5 




Bottom Margin 


5-6 




Left Margin 


5-6 




Right Margin 


5-7 




Top Print Ref 


5-8 




Left Print Ref 


5-9 




Horiz Expansion 


5-9 




Vert Expansion 


5-10 




VertExp Options 


5-10 




Print Modifiers 


5-11 




Print Options 


5-11 






Slew Rate 


5-12 


Sa 


ve Format 


5-12 


HorizTab 


5-13 


Vertical Format 


5-13 




Vertical Tabs 


5-14 




Emulation VFU. 


5-14 


[NTERR 


\ce Settings 


5-15 








MultiSource 


5-75 




Para 


llel Setup 


5-16 










Serial 


5-16 




^ 


Serial Type 


5-16 




Serial Setup 


5-17 






Protocol 


5-17 




XON/XOFF 


5-17 




CD(DTR) 


5-18 




CA(RTS) 


5-19 




SCA(SRTS) 


5-19 




ETX/ACK 


5-20 







GEK-99044 vn Table of Contents 



Inhibit Xmit 5-20 



Lead Polarity 5-21 



CD(DTR) 5-21 



CA(RTS) 5-21 



SCA(SRTS) 5-22 



CB(CTS) 5-22 



CC(DSR) 5-22 



Data Bits 5-23 

Parity 5-23 



Stop Bits 5-24 



Baud Rate 5-24 

High Trip Pt% 5-25 



Expansionl /Expansion! 5-25 



xpi 



e gacy Parallel 5-26 



Centronics 5-26 



DP(Short) 5-26 

DP(Long) 5-27 



I/F Straps 5-28 



Token Ring 5-28 



Coax 5-29 



Twinax 5-29 



TCP/IP 5-30 



Netware 5-30 



Engine Options 5-31 



Direction 5-31 



EngineOff Delay 5-31 



Print Intensity 5-32 



Print Control 5-32 



Define LF 5-33 



Define CR 5-33 



Define FF. 5-33 



Define HT 5-34 

VertMove 5-34 



AutoWrap 5-34 



FF(a) y TOF 5-35 



GenPtrOpts 5-35 



TearOff 5-35 



Path 5-36 



Retract 5-36 



Auto 5-36 



Emulation 5-37 



ANSI (4800) 5-38 



ANSI (4410) 5-38 



FX286E 5-39 

ProPrinter 5-39 



P 300/600 5-40 



DECLG 5-40 



Pseries 5-41 



DECPPL3 5-41 



ESC/P2 5-42 



Display Lan 5-42 



FI LTER 5-42 

\QMS 5-U 



BC Density 5-43 



Control Chars 5-44 

La nguage 5-44 



CodeV 5-45 



Free Format 5-45 

Ignore Mode 5-46 



5000 Series User's Manual vim GEK-99044 



Slashed Zero 5-46 



PY Terminator 5-46 



PN Terminator 5-47 



Vertical DPI 5-47 



LPIGrid 5-47 



Version 5-48 



Magnum Spaces 5-48 



Ignore Chr Mode 5-48 



Ignore Char 5-49 



IGP. 



5-49 



BC Density 5-49 



Control Chars 5-50 



Language 5-51 



IGP Terminator 5-51 



Quiet Mode 5-51 



Delete Logos 5-52 



Default OCR-B 5-52 



Vertical DPI 5-52 



Slashed Zero 5-53 



Clip Text 5-53 



Ignore Chr Mode 5-53 



Ignore Char 5-5"4 



IPDS 5-54 



IPDS BC Stagger 5-54 



IPDS BC Density 5- 



55 



IPDS GR Density 5-55 



IPDS Image Density 5-55 



IPDS Dens Ovr 5-56 



IBM Format 5-56 



Code Page 5-56 



CodePg Override 5-57 



LPI Override 5-57 



CPI Override 5-57 



MPP Override 5-58 



MPL Override 5-58 



Override Text 5-59 



Override All 5-59 



Hex Print 5-60 



Hexl 5-60 



Hex 2 5-61 



Hex Term 5-61 



DCF1 



.5-61 



DCF2. 



.5-62 



DCFTerm 5-63 



Coax Compat 5-63 



Case. 



.5-64 



LOCCopyFF 5-64 



FF Before LC 5-64 



IntervReq 5-65 



IrqErrTO 5-65 



IrqBsyTO 5-66 



CRatMPP+1 5-66 



NLatMPP+1 5-67 



FFData 5-67 



FFEndBuff 5-68 



Null Sup . 



FFPos 



.5-69 



AutoFunct 5-69 



LASTLF/FF 5-69 



SuppCCode 5-70 



VCS. 



.5-70 



Comm 5-71 



GEK-99044 



Table of Contents 



CHAPTER 6. USING THE MAINTENANCE MENU 6-1 



Reset to Deflts 


6-1 


Alignment 


6-2 










Patterns 


6-2 




Adjust Amplitude 


6-3 






HeadService 


6-4 




Dot Counts 


6-4 




Print Chart 


6-5 




Actuator Status 


6-6 






Power on Time 


6-6 


Prtnt Ttmf 


6-6 








Upgrade Flash 


6-7 


Rirron Monitor 


6-7 









CHAPTER 7. OPERATOR CARE AND MAINTENANCE 7-1 



Introduction 


7-1 








Operator Cleaning Procedures 


7-1 


5050/5100 (50, 55 or 60 dBa) Cabinetmodel 


7-1 


Operator Cleaning Procedures 


7-2 


5180(52or55 dB a) Cabinet model 


7-2 


Operator Troubleshooting 


7-3 




Soft Faults 


7-4 








Miscellaneous Non-Fault Messages 


7-7 




Hard Faults 


7-S 








Electrical Problems 


7-10 




Mechanical Problems 


7-11 




Self-test Error Messages 


7-72 


SERTAL INTERFACE RRR OR S 


7-13 








Print Head Replacement 


7-13 


5050/5100 (50, 55 or 60 dBa) cabinetmodel 


7-13 


Replacement Procedure 


7-14 


Print Head Replacement 


7-18 


5180 (52 or55 dBa) cabinetmodel 


7-18 




Resetting Print Head Counters 


7-27 







APPENDIX A UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS A-l 



Unpacking (5 180 52 dba Model) A-l 



Unpacking (5050/5100 55 DbA Model) A-4 



Repacking A- 6 



Unpacking (5 180 Model) A-6 



Removing the Shipping Blocks and Hardware A-7 



APPENDIX B PAPER SPECIFICATIONS B-l 



Recommended Paper Weights B-l 



APPENDIX C CONSIDERATIONS FOR OPERATION C-l 



APPENDIX D D-l 



PARTS, ACCESSORIES, CONSUMABLES AND OPTIONS D-l 



APPENDIX E. FONT PRINT SAMPLES E-l 



High speed Font E-l 



gothic Draft - Data processing font E-l 



GOTHIC NEAR LETTER QUALITY E-l 



5000 Series User's Manual x GEK-99044 



CHARACTER GRAPHICS FONT 


E-l 


CORRESPONDENCE FONT 


E-2 


OCR-AFONT 


R-2 




OCR-BFONT 


E-2 


COURIER NLQ FONT 


E-2 




ITALIC NLQ FONT 


E-2 


High Speed 2 


E-3 


CANADIAN PST 


E-3 



APPENDIX F. FLASH UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS F-l 



APPENDIX G DESCRIPTION OF STRAPPING OPTIONS G-l 



Legacy parallel Hardware strap definitions G-2 



Legacy Parallel Software Strap Definitions G-3 



General Printer Options Definitions G-4 



Emulation Option descriptions G-6 



APPENDIX H H-l 



INTERFACE EMULATION COMPATIBILITY G-l 



APPENDIX I. LCD MENU MAPS 1-1 



GEK-99044 xi Table of Contents 



CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 



This printer is a high duty cycle, line matrix printer. Among the 
advanced features of this printer are: 

High speed at 500/ 1000/1800 1pm 

Industry's only lifetime warranty on shuttle mechanism and 
striker bar 

IBM-compatible models 

Ideal for manufacturing pick lists and shipping documents 

Remote network printing 

Auto interface switching 

Top demand exit or rear exit standard (5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) 
Cabinet Model) 

Industrial graphics, bar codes, and labels 

Other characteristics include: 

Input voltage: 

5050/5100 Models auto range selecting 1 15V or 230V 

5 1 80 Models switchable 1 1 5V or 230V 

Hardware interfaces: menu selectable or auto switching between 
CENTRONICS parallel and RS-232 serial 

Standard emulation's: menu- or host-selectable ANSI 4800, ANSI 
4410, Epson FX286e, IBM Proprinter III XL, P 300/600, DEC LG 
and PPL3, Pseries, and ESC/P2. 

Standard fonts: menu- or host-selectable Data Processing, 
Correspondence, Gothic NLQ, Graphics, Courier NLQ, Italic NLQ, 
High Speed, OCR-A, OCR-B and Oversize. 



GEK-99044 



1-1 



Chapter 1. Introduction 



REFERENCE USAGE: 



Warning 



Warning is used to alert a user of a hazard that could cause 
personal injury or severe damage to the equipment. 



Caution 

Caution is used where there is a risk of damaging the equipment, 
parts or supplies. 



Note 
Indicates additional information. 



ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL 



This User's Manual covers the 5000 series printers. Some procedures 
discussed in this manual are model number and/ or cabinet specific. 
The differences are noted within sections where possible and 
separated into section where necessary. The following is a visual 
representation of the cabinet models available: 

5000 SERIES CABINET STYLES AND MODEL NUMBERS 







5050/5100 (50 dBa) 
5180 (52 dBa) 



5050/5100 (55 dBa) 5050/5100 (60 dBa) 5180 (55 dBa) 



This User's Manual is divided into the following main sections: 

Chapter 1: Introduction 

This chapter contains a brief introduction to the key features of the 
printer and the organization of this manual. 

Chapter 2: Getting Started 

This chapter contains the instructions necessary to get the printer up 
and running. 

Chapter 3: Operating the Printer 



5000 Series User's Manual 



1-2 



GEK-99044 



This chapter contains descriptions of the control panel, the 
pushbuttons and navigation through the menu options. 

Chapter 4: Using the Operator Menu 

This chapter details the procedures for accessing the options under 
the Operator Menu. 

Chapter 5: Using the Setup Menu 

This chapter details the procedures for accessing the options under 
the Set Up Menu. 

Chapter 6: Using the Maintenance Menu 

This chapter details the procedures for accessing the options under 
the Maintenance Menu 

Chapter 7: Operator Care and Maintenance 

This chapter contains information for the user to care and maintain 
the printer. 

The following appendices are provided for reference information: 

Appendix A: Unpacking & Repacking 

This appendix contains information necessary to unpack the printer 
or repack the printer for shipment. 

Appendix B: Paper Considerations 

This appendix contains information as a guide to paper supplies. 

Appendix C: Considerations for Operation 

This appendix contains specifications on the printer. 

Appendix D: Parts, Accessories, Consumables, Options 

This appendix contains a list of available parts, accessories, 
consumables and options available for the printer. 

Appendix E: Font Print Samples 

This appendix contains print samples of the font styles available on 
this printer. 

Appendix F: Flash Software Procedures 

This appendix contains upgrade software procedures. 

Appendix G: Description of Strapping Options 

This appendix contains reference tables listing hardware and 
software strapping options. 

Appendix H: Emulation Interface Compatibility 

This appendix contains reference tables for Emulation to Interface 
compatibility issues. 



GEK-99044 1-3 Chapter 1 . Introduction 



CHAPTER 2. GETTING STARTED 
PREPARING THE PRINTER FOR OPERATION 

Printer unpacking is complete when all accessories have been 
removed from the packaging and printer cabinet or pedestal. See 
"Appendix A Unpacking Procedures" for more information. 

Move the printer to a suitable operating location. See Appendix C for 
considerations on the space and conditions required for normal 
operation. 

The two front casters have locks to stabilize the printer once it has 
been moved to its location. Press one brake tab to lock the wheel of 
the caster and press the other tab to unlock. See Figure 2-1. 

Note 

The printer should be initially setup following the instructions 
given in this chapter, in the order presented. 



BRAKE TAB 




Figure 2-1 Brake Tab on Front Caster 



CONNECTING THE POWER CORD 



The 5050/5100 (50, 55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model printer is equipped 
with an auto-switching power supply and can be connected to either 
a 1 15V or 230V source without damage or manually changing a 
switch setting. 

The 5180 (52 or 55 dBa) Cabinet Model has a voltage selection switch 
located on the back panel. The switch has two positions, 1 15V and 
230V. The factory default is set to 230V. 

Caution 
(5180 (52 or 55 dBa) Cabinet Model) 
Set the voltage selection switch to the proper line voltage before 
plugging in the power cable. 

The allowable voltage variation is ± 1 5% and the allowable frequency 
is 48 to 65 Hz. 

A power cord is packed with the printer. Plug the female end of the 
cord into the recessed connector at the rear of the printer. See Figure 
2-2. Plug the other end into a compatible, properly grounded AC 
outlet. 



GEK-99044 2-1 Chapter 2. Getting Started 



Note 

The AC outlet must be rated for at least 10-ampere service. 

Avoid using AC circuits serving other equipment which may cause 
chronic low voltage, noise interference, or power fluctuations. Data 
loss may result. 



CONNECTING THE INTERFACE CABLE 



Both a 25-pin RS-232C serial interface connector and a 36-pin 
CENTRONICS parallel interface connector are standard on this 
printer. Both connectors are located on the data connector plate on 
the rear of the printer. See Figure 2-2. 



25-PIN SERIAL 
CONNECTOR 

36-PIN PARALLEL 
CONNECTOR 

I/O CARD 
INTERFACE SLOTS 




POWER ON/OFF 
(I/O) SWITCH 



FUSE HOLDER 



RECESSED CONNECTOR 



POWER CORD 



FIGURE 2-2 REAR VIEW OF PRINTER 
5050/5100 (55 dBa) MODEL 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-2 



GEK-99044 



I/O Interface Card Options available 



There are two expansion slots located in the rear of the printer. The 
interface options available are: 

Legacy parallel 

DPSL (Dataproducts short line) 

DPLL (Dataproducts long line) 

IBM/TX/CX 

Ethernet (10/100, lObaseT, and Token Ring) 



DESCRIPTION OF THE CONTROL PANEL 



The control panel is mounted in the top of the printer and is 
accessible with the top cover either open or closed. The Control Panel 
utilizes a display panel composed of two rows of sixteen characters 
each. With the top cover open, the control panel will move around 
slightly to the touch. This is normal. The floating mount allows the 
panel to align itself when the top cover is closed. 



On Line PfOGflMlng 



On Unu 

Of 1 Line 



M 



t 



ED 

1 

i 



I i 



sis- 



tnt^tiprih^ 




5050/5100 MODELS 
5180 (52 dBa) MODEL 



On Line 

Off bur 


\ 


* 

^ 


t) 




*] 


« 


TOF 




Funri^ 


J 



AJenn 



On Line PnocesEirgi 



is 

▼ 



FF 



Tear Ofl 



Vicvt 



Clear 



Sclitn 



fntettlprmt 




5180 (55 dBa) MODEL 



GEK-99044 



2-3 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



Beeper 



The basic look and layout of the 5050/5100 (55 dBa) Cabinet Model 
control panel is represented by the following: 

The four pushbuttons to the right of the display are to navigate the 
menu tree structure and are referred as menu browse pushbuttons. 
The On Line/Off Line pushbutton is located at the top of the left row of 
pushbuttons. The three pushbuttons below the On Line/Off Line 
pushbutton, t (up arrow), J, (down arrow), and TOF, are used to set 
top of form. See "Setting Top of Form" in Chapter 3 for additional 
information. The bottom left pushbutton, Format (in conjunction with 
the Select pushbutton), is used to select one often stored form 
formats. The FF, Tear Off, and View pushbuttons under the display 
are additional paper positioning functions. The Clear and Select 
pushbuttons are used in data entry. 



Note 

The locations of the pushbuttons and display on the 5180 (55 
dBa) Cabinet Model are different, however the functionality of 
each is the same. 

When in the online state, only the FF, On Line/Off Line, Tear Off, & 
View pushbuttons and limited functionality of the Clear and Select 

pushbuttons are active. Pressing any other pushbutton causes a 
"beep." The "Processing" LED indicator is lit whenever data is being 
received and or being processed/ printed. In multi-source I/O mode, 
the "Processing" LED indicator will blink for the duration of the 
timeout period when processing is complete. 

Note 

The control panel mount on the 5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) and 
5180 (52 dBa) Cabinet Model is hinged so that it can be tilted 
forward to remove the ribbon deck for service. 



The control panel beeper sounds momentarily when: 

■ A pushbutton is pressed. 

■ A BEL control code is received. (The host can send a "bell" code to 

sound the printer's beeper. For more information, see the 
Programmer's Manual.) 

■ A PAPER LOW condition exists. 

■ An EVFU loading error occurs. (For more information on the 

EVFU, see the Programmer 's Manual.) 

■ A hard fault occurs. (See Chapter 7 for an explanation of hard 

faults.) 



5000 Series User's Manual 2-4 GEK-99044 



Display 



Pushbuttons 



The two row by sixteen-character LCD provide the following 
information: 

■ The printer's status - Online, Local, Self-test, etc. 

■ Which menu or menu option is presently on display to assist in 

making selections. 

■ When a fault condition exists. 



The pushbuttons are sealed and raised rubber-type switches used to 
make menu selections, clear faults, and position the paper. An 
explanation of the pushbuttons' functions is given in the following 
section on "Operation of the Control Panel." 



OPERATION OF THE CONTROL PANEL 



On Line 
Off Line 



TOF 



FF 



The primary use of each pushbutton is printed beside the button 
itself. 

Pressing the On Line/Off Line pushbutton causes the printer to toggle 
between online and offline operation. Offline operation allows access 
to the menu functions. 

Pressing the T pushbutton moves paper up incrementally. 
Pressing the i pushbutton moves paper down incrementally. 



Pressing the TOF (Top of Form) pushbutton sets the top of form 
position on the printer. 

Pressing the Format pushbutton allows the operator to select from up 
to ten stored formats. The pushbutton is repeatedly pressed until the 
desired set up format is being displayed, press the Select pushbutton 
to activate the selected format. 

Pressing the FF pushbutton moves paper to next top of form 
according to the top of form set for the printer. 



Tear Off 



Pressing the Tear Off pushbutton advances the paper to the selected 
tear position and will auto retract to the selected retract position after 
15 seconds. Pressing the tear off pushbutton any time within that 15 
second wait period will retract the paper to the selected retract 
position. The printer will emit three beeps prior to retracting the 
paper. 



GEK-99044 



2-5 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



View 



Clear 



Pressing the View pushbutton advances the paper such that the last 
printed line is visible in the top cover window. Pressing the View 
pushbutton a second time will return the paper to the last print 
position. Receipt of any data will also retract the paper to the print 
position. 

Press the Clear pushbutton to exit or backup data entry and selection 
levels. 



Select 



<•][•> 



Press the Select pushbutton to enter or select data entry. 



Pressing the menu browse pushbuttons allows navigation of menu 
selections. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons 
allows navigation of menu selections laterally within the same level. 
Pressing the ▲ (up) or T (down) menu browse pushbuttons allows 
navigation up or down a level of menus. While in a user set option, 
these pushbuttons are used for data entry. 



Data Entry 



There are two modes of data entry for the control panel. The first 
mode is to select from a list of several options displayed on the 
bottom line of the LCD. The entries are sequentially displayed on the 
bottom line of the LCD in response to browse pushbuttons ( < and ► 
.)The optional selections are shown as a circular list. For example, in 
selecting CPI, the choices 10, 12<, 13.3, 15, 16.7, 17.1, 20, and XX.X 
USER SET will be displayed sequentially. If one of the displayed 
values (i.e. numbers) are selected (other than the XX.X USER SET) 
the selection process is completed by depressing the Select 
pushbutton. 

Note 

The current setting is marked with the < symbol (12< shown 
above.) 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-6 



GEK-99044 



In USER SET mode the display switches to a format where the 
operator may enter any value to 9 for any "X" position. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal < ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or down) 
pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by one. In the 
example used previously, 12 CPI was active when the selection 
process is entered (shown above as 12<). The operator selected from 
the list, the XX.X USER SET. The display shows 12.0, where the 
underline indicates the active digit, and where 12.0 is the current CPI 
value. Depressing the up menu browse pushbutton increments that 
digit from 12.0 to 22.0 or higher, where only the first digit 
increments. Depressing the right arrow pushbutton moves the cursor 
from 22.0 to 22.0. Depressing the right arrow again moved the cursor 
from 22.0 to the 10 th position (the decimal point is automatically 
skipped over) from 22.0 to 22.0. Depressing the right down arrow 
pushbutton changes the digit from 20.0 to 20.9 (the values wrap 1 
23456789 etc). 

Note 

Since the four menu browse pushbuttons are used to make this 
type of entry, use the Select pushbutton or CLEAR pushbutton to 
exit this type of data entry. If the Select pushbutton is pressed, 
the display shows the selection as from above: 22.9 USER SET. If 
the CLEAR pushbutton is used, the menu entry jumps back to 
the previous (higher) level showing XX.X User Set as above 
without changing the CPI. 



GEK-99044 2-7 Chapter 2. Getting Started 



INSTALLING THE PAPER HANDLING SYSTEM 
(55 OR 60 dBa CABINET MODELS) 

The paper handling system for this printer consists of an upper paper 
rack and a paper shelf with wickets and a stacking aid. See Figure 2- 
4a. The upper rack on the 5180 (55 dBa) Cabinet Model is shaped 
differently, but its functionality is the same (see Figure 2 -4b.) The 
5050/5100 (50 dBa) and 5180 (55 dBa) Cabinet Models have 
internally installed paper handling aids. 



UPPER PAPER 

RACK 

5050/5100 

55 dBa Model 

WICKETS 



TIGHTENING 
KNOB 




V SHAPED 
STACKING AID 



PAPER SHELF 



FIGURE 2-4A PAPER HANDLING SYSTEM (5050/5100 55dba) 



HOLES TO 
HANG SHELF 




OLES TO 
HANG SHELF 



METAL PLATE 



FIGURE 2-4b UPPER RACK AND LOWER PAPER 

SHELF INSTALLED 

5180 (55 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-8 



GEK-99044 



LEFT END 
WIRE LOOP 



The paper shelf hangs on the back of the printer near the floor. The 
paper rack hooks onto the two end wire loops protruding from the 
rear paper exit. Use the following procedures to install the paper 
handling system: 

1 . Hang the paper shelf on the back of the printer in the holes 
provided as shown in Figure 2 -4a. 

Note 

The 5180 (55 dBa) Cabinet Model paper shelf attaches to a solid 
metal plate. The metal plate is attached to the back of the 
printer in the holes provided as shown in Figure 2-4b. 

2. Install the wickets on the shelf so the tightening knobs are facing 
away from the area the paper will occupy. 

3. Slide the wickets along the shelf so the distance between the 
wickets accommodates the length of the fanfold paper (form 
length). 

4. Lay the V-shaped paper stacking aid on the shelf between the 
wickets. This stacking aid should be used when stacks of 1000 or 
more forms are anticipated. See Figure 2 -4a and Figure 2 -4b. 

5. Hook the paper rack onto the two end wire loops protruding from 
the rear paper exit. See Figure 2-5. 




RIGHT END 
WIRE LOOP 



FIGURE 2-5 REAR VIEW 
5050/5100 (55dBa) CABINET MODEL SHOWN) 

Note 

The 5180 (55dBa) Cabinet Model has an opening in the back of 
the printer. The upper paper rack has two metal hooks, which 
hang over the edge of the opening to hold the rack in place. See 
Figure 2-6b. 



GEK-99044 



2-9 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



6. After the rack is hooked into place, swing it up as shown in the 
illustration on the left and connect the two static ground wires. 
See Figure 2-6a. 



STATIC 

GROUND WIRE 

CONNECTOR 

(TWO PLACES) 





FINISHED 
INSTALLATION 



FIGURE 2-6a SIDE VIEWS 
5050/5100 (55 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



METAL 

HOOK 

HANGS ON 

EDGE OF 

OPENING 




FINISHED 
INSTALLATION 



ATTACH GROUND 
CABLES 



FIGURE 2-6b REAR VIEW 
5180 (55 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-10 



GEK-99044 



Paper Handling Aids (55 dBa) Cabinet Models 



A paper handling "wicket" is shipped with the 55 dBa model printer. 
It is positioned at the outside edge of the rear paper cabinet to assist 
in the vertical stacking of the paper. Magnets hold the wicket in 
various positions according to the type of form being printed. See 
Figure 2-7. 




..../ / 



FIGURE 2-7 PAPER HANDLING "WICKET" 

Another paper handling device shipped with the printer is a 
"V"-shaped, metal paper stacking aid. Some papers tend to curl as 
the stack builds in the paper compartment. This device will alleviate 
that situation. See Figure 2-8. 




Figure 2-8 "V" Shaped Metal Paper Stacking Aid 

SELECTING THE PAPER PATH 

5050/5100 (55 and 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL ONLY 

This printer has a top exit paper path and a rear exit paper path. 

The top path is used when forms or peel-off labels are printed from 
the printer individually. 

The rear path is used when high volume or unattended print jobs are 
printed. 



GEK-99044 2-1 1 Chapter 2. Getting Started 



When the top is closed, the paper will automatically seek the rear 
exit. To switch to the top exit, push down on the ears of the top exit 
door as shown below. 



TOP PAPER PATH 



REAR PAPER PATH 



EARS OF THE TOP EXIT DOOR 




o o 

FIGURE 2-9 TOP AND REAR PAPER PATHS 
5050/5100 (55 dBa) CABINET MODEL SHOWN 

Note 

Choose the paper path before allowing the paper to go past the 
upper tractors. The top cover must be closed for the paper to use 
either path. 



Wire Paper Guide 



The printer is shipped with a wire paper guide installed. The purpose 
of this part is to prevent paper jams when the rear (default) paper exit 
is used. 

To thread paper through the rear exit, lift up the paper guide until it 
sticks to the magnet on the top cover. See Figure 2-10. 



MAGNET 




FIGURE 2-10 WIRE PAPER GUIDE 
5050/5100 (55 OR 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL) 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-12 



GEK-99044 



Note 

The 5180 model uses rear paper path only. To have paper exit 
through the top (5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model only), 
the paper guide must be removed. Placing a hand under the 
paper guide at the left end, lift up and away at an angle. See 
Figure 2- 11a. Placing a hand under the right side of the paper 
guide, lift up and toward the front of the printer. See Figures 2- 
11b and 2- lie. 




FIGURE 2 - 11a 



FIGURE 2 - lib 



FIGURE 2 - lie 



If the rear exit paper path is used without the paper guide installed, 
paper may jam in the top cover. 

To re-install the paper guide, find the wires that are closest together 
on the left end. Install the guide so that these two wires straddle the 
left mounting bracket. This holds the part in place horizontally. The 
small ring on the paper guide slides onto the corresponding prong on 
the paper deflector. 



TWO WIRES CLOSEST 
TOGETHER 




FIGURE 2-12 REINSTALLING THE PAPER GUIDE (LEFT VIEW) 
5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



GEK-99044 



2-13 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



LOADING PAPER 



This printer is designed to use edge-punched (sprocket, or pin-fed) 
fanfold paper. See "Paper Specifications" in Appendix B for further 
description of the types of paper that can be used in the printer. 

CAUTION 

Printing without paper or using paper too narrow for the job may 
damage printer components and void the printer warranty. Full- 
width paper (greater than 14 5/8-inch or 371cm) should be used 
until the operator is familiar with the printer's setup and 
operation. 



Manual Paper Loading 

To load paper in the printer, complete the following steps: 



Paper Out 



1. Raise the top cover to the open position. On 5050/5100 (55 or 60 
dBa) Cabinet Model printers, press the cover latch to unlock the 
cover. See Figure 2-13. 



FRONT LATCH 




FIGURE 2-13 FRONT VIEW OF PRINTER 
5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 












FIGURE 2-13B 
5180 (55dBa) CABINET MODEL 



FIGURE 2-13C 
5180 (52 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-14 



GEK-99044 



Strikr Bar Open 



2. Turn the print gap wheel to the LOAD position by pushing the top 
of the wheel towards the rear of the printer until it stops. See 
Figure 2- 14a. (On the 5180 model, turn the print gap adjust knob 
to the LOAD position by turning the knob fully clockwise. See 
Figure 2- 14a.) 

Note 

If the power has been applied to the printer, the fault messages 
Paper Out and Strikr Bar Open will appear on the display panel and 
the beeper will sound. These will alternately display in the upper 
left corner of the display panel until the CLEAR pushbutton is 
pressed. 



PAPER 

TENSION 

LEVER 



PRINT GAP 
WHEEL 



— 1 r^Htj 


1 W j-4&^' 


S^ifL 


\-r ™" 




W !?&*■ 




Ill HI 


in 



FIGURE 2- 14a PRINT GAP WHEEL IN LOAD POSITION 
5050/5100 (50,55, or 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



PAPER 

TENSION 

LEVER 




PRINT GAP 
WHEEL 



FIGURE 2- 14b PRINT GAP WHEEL IN LOAD POSITION 
5180 (55 OR 52 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

3. Push the paper tension adjustment lever down to position 1. See 
Figure 2-14a(b). 



GEK-99044 



2-15 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



4. Open the top left and right tractor doors. See Figure 2-15. 

5. Open the front door and place the paper supply in the enclosure. 



UPPER 

LEFT 

TRACTOR 




UPPER 

RIGHT 

TRACTOR 



FIGURE 2-15 TOP VIEW OF PRINTER 
5050/5100 (55 dBa) CABINET MODEL SHOWN) 

Note 

Either cut the top off the box of paper or tape the flaps down to 
prevent snagging the paper as it leaves the box. 

6. On 5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model printers, grasp the 
bottom edge of the front access panel of the printer and lift it to 
the open position. A magnetic latch will hold the panel open. See 
Figure 2-16. 




FRONT ACCESS PANEL 



FRONT COVER DOOR 




FIGURE 2-16 FRONT ACCESS PANEL AND FRONT CABINET DOOR OPEN 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-16 



GEK-99044 



7. Open the lower left and right tractor doors. See Figure 2-17 

Note 

To load single-part paper, fold the paper over at a perforation so 
that the first two forms are double-thick. Later, when printer 
power is on, feed these doubled forms out of the printer before 
adjusting the print gap. 

8. Hand feed the paper, bypassing the lower tractor pins, up 
through the printer to the top tractors. After the printer is in 
operation, the semiautomatic paper loading feature may be used. 

Note 

Initially, load the paper so that it will print on the second form 
(rather than first form) because a default setting pulls the paper 
down into the printer a minimum of 4 inches (see "Setting Top 
of Form"). Later, vertical positioning and top of form (TOF) 
alignment will be completed after the printer is in operation. 

9. Place the paper onto the pins of the upper left tractor and close 
the tractor door. 

If necessary, release the locking lever on the right-hand tractor by 
flipping it down, and slide the tractor sideways to match the 
paper width. If necessary, see Figure 2-18. 

10. Place the paper on the pins of the upper right tractor, making 
sure that the paper is straight horizontally, and close the tractor 
door. 




FIGURE 2-17 LOWER TRACTOR DOORS 

With the right tractor locking lever released, slide the tractor 
slightly to the right to make the paper taut. Excessive tension will 
tear the pinholes and cause the paper to become misaligned. Lock 
the tractor in place by pressing up on the locking lever. 



GEK-99044 



2-17 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



1 1 . While applying a slight downward tension, lay the paper onto the 
lower tractors and close the tractor doors. If needed, unlock and 
adjust the right tractor for correct paper tension. 




FIGURE 2-18 RIGHT HAND TRACTOR 



12. Close the front cover. For the 5050/5100 (55 dBa) Cabinet Model 
printers, close the front access panel of the printer, and then 
close the front cabinet door. 

Note 

After the paper has been loaded, the print gap, paper tension, 
and top of form position must be set. These settings are 
discussed later is this chapter after the installation of the ribbon 
cartridge. 



Semiautomatic Paper Loading 



Once the printer's tractors have been set up for the specific paper 
being used and power has been applied; the semiautomatic paper 
loading feature may be used. 

After the paper is loaded in the lower tractors, pressing the FF (form 
feed) pushbutton causes the paper to move up at a slower rate (10 
inches per second) to the top tractors. 

Note 

Some extremely thin forms, stiff cardstock, forms with raised 
labels, or envelopes with cutouts may not work with this feature. 
If there are problems, load the paper manually. 

With the print gap wheel in the LOAD position, the paper tension 
lever at position 1, and the upper tractor doors open, complete the 
following steps: 

1. Load the paper onto the lower tractors. 

2. Open the upper tractor doors. 

3. Press the FF pushbutton to move the paper up through the 
printer to the upper tractors. 

4. Load the paper onto the upper tractors and close the tractor 
doors. Unlock and adjust the upper right tractor as needed. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-18 



GEK-99044 



HORIZONTAL POSITIONING OF THE PAPER 

The column indicator label is located just below the left upper tractor 
on the 5050/5100 model. See Figure 2-19. On the 5180 model, the 
column indicator is located on the ribbon deck. Use this label as a 
guide to position the paper horizontally within the printer. Turn the 
horizontal paper adjustment knob to align the paper as needed. This 
positions the paper for the first physical print column. On the 5180 
model, the horizontal paper adjustment knob is located on the left 
just above the paper gap wheel. (See Figure 2-26) 

If a left margin is desired, it is set electronically through either the 
control panel pushbuttons or a command sent by the host. 

The marks on the label are set up for paper with a 1/2-inch 
perforation strip. 

Aligning the edge of the paper with the first mark, as shown below, 
will cause the first column to print immediately after the perforation 
strip. Aligning the edge of the paper with the mark labeled 1.0 will 
cause the first column to print 1 inch from the edge. Using 6 
characters per inch, this position is column 6 on the paper after the 
perforation strip. 



HORIZONTAL PAPER 
ADJUSTMENT KNOB 




FIGURE 2-19 TOP VIEW AND COLUMN INDICATOR 
5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



GEK-99044 



2-19 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



THE RIBBON DECK 

5050/5100 (55 OR 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

The ribbon deck contains the drive mechanism for the ribbon 
cartridge. The locking lever is used to open (LOAD position) and close 
(RUN position) the ribbon drive gears. 

The ribbon fabric in the cartridge is placed between the drive gears of 
the deck as the cartridge is lowered onto the deck. When the locking 
lever is moved to the RUN position, the drive gears move together to 
grip the fabric. See Figure 2-20. 



DRIVE GEARS 

SEPARATED 

(OPEN) 



LOCKING LEVER 
IN LOAD POSITION 




RIBBON MOTION 
SENSOR 



DRIVE GEARS 
ENGAGE RIBBON 
FABRIC (CLOSED) 

LOCKING LEVER IN 
RUN POSITION 



FIGURE 2-20a THE RIBBON DECK 
5050/5100 MODEL 

After the ribbon cartridge is in place and the locking lever has been 
turned to the RUN position, the ribbon drive knob is turned 
clockwise to manually advance the ribbon fabric. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-20 



GEK-99044 



THE RIBBON DECK 

5180 (52 OR 55 DBA) CABINET MODEL 



The ribbon deck contains the drive mechanism for the ribbon 
cartridge and a positioning pin, located to the left of the air duct and 
behind the captive screw. Also located on the ribbon deck is the print 
module access panel. See Figure 20b. 



PART OF AIR 

DUCT FOR PRINT 

MODULES 



POSITIONING PIN 
LOCATED HERE 




CAPTIVE 


PRINT MODULE / 


CAPTIVE 


SCREW 


ACCESS PANEL / 

DRIVE MECHANISM 
FOR RIBBON CARTRIDGE 


SCREW 



FIGURE 20b THE RIBBON DECK 
5180 (52 OR 55 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



GEK-99044 



2-21 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



THE RIBBON CARTRIDGE 

5050/5100 (50,55 OR 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

The top side of the ribbon cartridge has a window for viewing the 
ribbon fabric, the yellow spool knob for taking up slack in the ribbon, 
and an orange slide lever used to position internal parts. A removable 
shipping tab is located in the window on new cartridges. The bottom 
side has an opening for the ribbon deck drive gears and locking lever. 
When the ribbon is installed, the locking lever and ribbon drive knob 
will pass through the openings in the top side of the cartridge. Some 
ribbon cartridges have a reinker for longer life. The reinker lever 
should be rotated clockwise after the ribbon installation. See Figure 
2-21. 



WINDOW FOR VIEWING 
RIBBON FABRIC 



ORANGE SLIDE LEVER (FAR 

LEFT POSITION FOR 

INSTALLATION 




YELLOW SPOOL KNOB 
(TURN CLOCKWISE) 



SHIPPING TAB LOCATED 

HERE FOR NEW RIBBON 

CARDTRIDGE 



REINKER LEVER 

OPENING FOR RIBBON 
DECK LOCKING LEVER 



FIGURE 2-21 ABOUT THE RIBBON CARTRIDGE 

RIBBON REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 
5050/5100 (50,55 OR 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

1. Raise the top cover. On the 5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) model 
printers, press the cover latch to unlock the cover. 

2. Turn the print gap wheel to the LOAD position. 

3. Turn the ribbon locking lever clockwise to the LOAD position. 

4. Make sure the orange slide lever on the ribbon cartridge is in the 
full left position. 

5. Turn the yellow spool knob clockwise to take out any slack in the 
ribbon fabric between the cartridge arms. 

6. Hold the ribbon cartridge over the ribbon deck at an angle that 
matches the tilt of the ribbon deck as described below: 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-22 



GEK-99044 



Facing the front of the printer, hold the ribbon cartridge so the 
body of the cartridge is parallel to the floor. Rotate the ribbon 
cartridge down so that the angle of the cartridge (front to back) 
matches the tilt of the ribbon deck. See Figure 2-22. 



RIBBON CARTRIDGE 




PARALLEL 
TO DECK 



FIGURE 2-22 LEFT SIDE CUTAWAY VIEW 

7. Lower the ribbon cartridge onto the ribbon deck so that the drive 
gears on the deck enter the opening on the bottom of the 
cartridge. 

8. After the cartridge is in place, grasp the ribbon shipping tab on 
the ribbon cartridge and pull it up and towards the left to remove 
it from the cartridge. 



GEK-99044 



2-23 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



9. Look into the window of the ribbon cartridge and make sure the 
ribbon fabric is not twisted, or folded, between the ribbon deck 
drive gears. If necessary, turn the yellow spool knob to straighten 
the fabric. See Figure 2-23. 



ORANGE SLIDE LEVER 



WINDOW 



LOOKING THROUGH THE^ 

WINDOW WITH THE 

CARTRIDGE QFFTHE 

DECK 



LOOKING THROUGH THEC 

WINDOW WITH THE 

CARTRIDGE Q^THE 

DECK 



FABRIC 
TOO . 
LOOSE 



FABRIC 
SNAGGED 
ON GEAR 




YELLOW SPOOL KNOB 



RIBBON FABRIC 



FABRIC 

- RELATIVELY 

STRAIGHT 



FABRIC 

BETWEEN 

GEARS 



FIGURE 2-23 CHANGING OR REINSTALLING A RIBBON 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-24 



GEK-99044 



10. Turn the ribbon locking lever counterclockwise to the RUN 
position. Turn the ribbon drive knob clockwise to unwind any 
ribbon fabric that has been wound onto the spool. The yellow 
spool knob will stop turning when all fabric has been unwound. 

1 1 . If the ribbon cartridge has a reinker, turn the reinker lever 
clockwise to the ON position. If necessary, see Figure 2-21. 

Note 

After the ribbon cartridge has been installed, the print gap, paper 
tension, paper path, and top of form position must be set. See 
"Setting the Print Gap" later in this chapter for more 
information. 




RIBBON LOCKING 
LEVER IN RUN POSITION 



FIGURE 2-24 RIBBON LOCKING 



Removing a Ribbon (50,55, or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model 

1. Place the printer offline and raise the top cover. 

2. Turn the print gap wheel to the LOAD position. If necessary, see 
Figure 2-14 

3. Turn the ribbon locking lever clockwise to the LOAD position. If 
necessary, see Figure 2-24. 

4. Lift the ribbon off the ribbon deck. 

RIBBON REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 
5180 (52 OR 55 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

Use the following procedure to install a ribbon on a 5180 (52 or, 55 
dBa) Cabinet Model printer: 

1 . Lift the top cover of the printer. 

2. If the thickness of the paper will remain the same after the ribbon 
cartridge is installed, note the present position of the paper gap 
adjust knob. See Figure 2-26. 



GEK-99044 2-25 Chapter 2. Getting Started 



3. Turn the paper gap adjust knob clockwise to the LOAD position. 

4. Turn the knurled knob on the new ribbon cartridge clockwise to 
remove any slack in the ribbon. See Figure 2-25. 



HOLE FOR 

POSITIONS 

PIN 




BOTTOM 




KNURLED KNOB FOR TIGHTENING 

RIBBON 

(CLOCKWISE) 



TOP 

FIGURE 2-25 RIBBON CARTRIDGE 
5180 (52 or55 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

Refer to Figure 2-26. Tilt the left side of the ribbon cartridge down 
and place it on the positioning pin. Guide the cartridge onto 
positioning pin. Guide the ribbon between the air duct and the 
smudge shield. Then lower the right side of the cartridge onto the 
ribbon motor drive shaft. Turn the knurled knob on the ribbon 
cartridge to allow the drive shaft to enter the cartridge. Turn the 
knob a few more times to assure that the ribbon is running freely 
and that any remaining slack is removed. 




HORIZONTAL 
ADJUST KNOB 



PRINT GAP 
ADJUST 
WHEEL 



GUIDE CARTRIDGE 

ONTO 

POSITIONING PIN 




SMUDGE 
SHIELD 



RIBBON 



FIGURE 2-26 RIBBON INSTALLATION 
5050/5100 (55 dBa) and 5180 (55 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-26 



GEK-99044 



6. Reset the paper gap adjust knob to its original position or to a 
setting appropriate for the paper thickness being used. 

7. Close the top door of the printer. 



SETTING THE PRINT GAP 



The print gap wheel is used to adjust the distance between the bank 
of print head actuators and the striker bar. See Figures 2- 14a and 2- 
14b for location of print gap wheel. 

Setting the gap too tightly will cause smudging on the paper and can 
obstruct the movement of the shuttle mechanism. Overloading or 
stalling the shuttle will cause the printer to stop and Shuttle will be 
displayed on the control panel. 

Setting the gap too loosely may cause unacceptable print quality and 
excessive noise. 

Note 

The moisture and content and the thickness of the paper 
determine the ideal setting. Adjust the print gap wheel to 
produce the best quality possible. 



Reading the Scale 



The print gap wheel on the 5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model 
has two scales to aid in setting the proper gap. See Figure 2-27. 



WHITE 


I ^m 1 

Hi 

J BT* 


SCALE 
BLACK 


i ■"'*■ Mt- ■ ■ ^^ 


SCALE 


B-SB^t 



FIGURE 2-2 

5050/5100 (50, 55 or 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

BLACK AND WHITE SCALE 

Using the White Scale 

The white scale with the black markings is used to set the gap by the 
number of parts in the paper being used or adjustments for paper 
thickness. The higher the number the larger the print gap. For 
example, set the wheel to 1 for single-part paper, 2 for two-part 
paper, etc. 

This is a relative setting. A change in the paper weight or the 
thickness of the carbon paper (if used) in multipart forms may 



GEK-99044 2-27 Chapter 2. Getting Started 



require further adjustment. Cardstock and carriers with stick-on 
labels require a larger print gap (higher number on the scale). 

Using the Black Scale 

The black scale with the white markings is used when direct 
measurements in thousandths of an inch are made. Its main use was 
during the factory setup of the printer. 

After the ideal gap setting has been found for a particular type of 
form, note the wheel setting using the black scale. For example, a 
four-part form with a heavy first sheet may run best with the wheel 
set at 21 or 23 on the black scale instead of somewhere in the 4 range 
on the white scale. The smaller increments (one click of the wheel per 
number) provide a more accurate setting to go back to after reloading 
paper or changing the ribbon. 



PAPER TENSION ADJUSTMENT 



PAPER TENSION 
LEVER 



The paper tension lever is located next to the print gap wheel. It is 
used to maintain the proper tension on the paper during printing. 
See Figure 2-28. On the 5180 (55 dBa) Cabinet Model, the paper 
tension lever is located to the left of the print gap adjust knob. See 
Figure 2-30. 

Move the lever to position 1 (the bottom position) when loading paper, 
setting top of form, and printing single-part paper. This position 
applies the least tension to the paper and should be used as the first 
trial position for all forms. 

For multipart forms and single-part paper that is heavier than 20 
pounds, higher paper tension lever settings may be required. Six-part 
forms are normally run at the second or third position. 

The higher paper tension settings are used to squeeze air out from 
between the layers of multipart forms. Increase the tension if the print 
quality on the last part of the form is printing too light. 




FIGURE 2-28 PAPER TENSION LEVER 
5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-28 



GEK-99044 



Note 
Too much tension may tear the paper or elongate the holes. 



POWER-ON SEQUENCE 



Startup 


Loading — 1 
Please Wait— | 




Self Test 




Online 


Status 



With the ribbon cartridge and paper installed and the power cable 
connected, the printer is ready for power to be applied. The power 
switch is located on the rear panel. See Figure 2-2. 

The following describes the power-on sequence and shows the 
expected display: 

1. The printer starts diagnostics and Startup shows on the display. 
The shuttle and ribbon motors will run for a brief period. 

2. The printer loads the processing software and Loading — is 
displayed in the upper left corner of the display and Please wait... 
is displayed in the lower right corner of the display. The printer's 
display briefly shows Self Test before returning to the previous 
display. During this loading and self test phase, the alarm light 
flashes. 

3. The printer completes the sequence in approximately 15 
seconds. 

4. When the power-on sequence and self-test are completed, Online 
is displayed in the upper left corner of the display window and 
Status is displayed in the lower right corner of the display. The 
alarm light discontinues flashing. 



INTERLOCK CIRCUIT 



This printer has an interlock circuit to meet safety and international 
requirements. 



GEK-99044 



2-29 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model 



The interlock switch circuit disables the power supply voltage when 
the ribbon deck is lifted. This eliminates any potential shock hazard 
or inadvertent printer start-up while moving parts in the print area 
are accessible. The ribbon deck must be in place and all three 
thumbscrews must be tightened securely for printer operation. See 
Figure 2-29. 




THREE 
THUMBSCREWS 



FIGURE 2-29 

5050/5100 (50, 55 OR 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

THUMBSCREWS ON RIBBON DECK 

Note 

Removing the ribbon deck with the power applied will energize 
the interlock circuit. If this happens, the deck must be replaced, 
power must be turned off for a period of 5 minutes before 
attempting to reapply power. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-30 



GEK-99044 



5180 (55 dBa) Model 



UPPER TRACTORS 



TOP ACCESS DOOR 
INTERLOCK SWITCH 



PAPER TENSION 
ADJUST LEVER 



PRINT GAP ADJUST KNOB 



PRINT MODULE ACCESS 

PANEL SCREW 
HIDDEN AC INTERLOCK) 




TRACTOR LOCKING LEVER 

RIBBON MOTOR DRIVE SHAFT 
HORIZONTAL ADJUST KNOB 



FIGURE 2-30 LEFT TOP VIEW 
5180 (55 dBa) MODEL 

Top Access Door Interlock Switch 

The top access door interlock switch is located in the upper left 
corner of the door opening. See Figure 2-30. When the door is 
opened, the beeper will sound, printing will stop, and the message 
Cover Open will be displayed in the LCD. To use the printer with the 
door open, pull the switch plunger up and press the Clear 
pushbutton to clear the display. The 5180 (52 dBa) Cabinet Model 
does not have a top access door interlock switch. 

Print Module Access Panel AC Interlock Switch 

The AC interlock switch disconnects AC power from the power supply 
when the print module access panel is lifted. See Figure 2-30. This 
eliminates any potential shock hazard or inadvertent printer start-up 
while moving parts in the print area are accessible. The shelf must be 
in place and the screws must be tightened securely for printer 
operation. 



GEK-99044 



2-31 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



INITIALIZING THE PRINTER 

Initializing resets the printer electronics and sets the printer 
parameters to factory defaults. Parameters include margins, tabs, 
forms control, characters per inch, lines per inch, etc. 

When to Initialize 

Initialize the printer when: 

■ It is desirable to reset the printer to the factory default settings. 

■ The electronics lock up, causing the printer to ignore control 

panel inputs. 

■ Repair actions involving the logic circuit boards have been made. 



USING THE KEYPAD TO INITIALIZE 



Using the control panel pushbuttons to initialize the printer allows 
resetting to the factory default parameters, all interfaces, all 
emulations, all formats or a complete reset of all parameters. 

If the printer was operating before initialization, it may need to be 
reconfigured for the specific task at hand. Refer to the status page 
printout and/ or formats page printout to reset the printers settings 
to those used before initialization. (See "Show" in the "Using the 
Operator's Menu" section of Chapter 4 for procedures to print the 
status page and formats page.) 

Note 

The menu option All Formats will reset all previously saved 
formats (customer defined) to factory defaults. Previously saved 
formats cannot be recalled. It is recommended a status page and 
format page be printed before performing this option. Use these 
printouts to re-configure formats and/ or settings reset to factory 
defaults. 



Control Panel Initialization 



Online 



Status 



Local 



Menu 



Main Menu 

Maintenance 



Maintenance 

Reset to Deflts 



Use the following procedures to initialize the printer using the control 
panel: 

1. Press the On Line pushbutton to place the printer in an offline 
state. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Main 
Menu. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Maintenance is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 

4. Press the T (down) arrow to access the Maintenance menu 
options. Maintenance will be displayed in the upper left corner of 
the display window and Reset to Deflts will be displayed in the 
lower right corner. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-32 



GEK-99044 



Reset to Deflts 



USA 



Factory Deflts 

All Interfaces 



5. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton again. USA will be 
displayed in the lower right corner of the display window. 

6. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton to select a 
USA or International setting. 

7. Press the T (down) menu browse to access the options under 
USA or International. 

8. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton to select 
either, All Interfaces, All Formats, All Emulations, or Complete. 

Note 

The All Interfaces option will reset all interface settings in the 
printer to the factory set default values or settings. The All 
Formats option will reset all previously saved formats in the 
printer to the factory set default values or settings. The All 
Emulations option will reset all emulation settings in the printer 
to factory set default values or settings. The Complete option 
will reset the printer to factory set defaults for all interfaces, all 
previously saved formats, and all emulations. 

9. Press the Select pushbutton next to the type of reset option 
desired to reset printer. The printer momentarily displays 

STARTUP, Loading Please Wait and complete a power-up 

sequence. 



TEST PATTERN PRINTING 



Local 



Menu 



Main Menu 



Operator 



Operator 



Adjust TOF 



Adjust TOF 

Rolling ASCII 



Print Pattern 

CLEAR to Stop 



1. With the printer in Local menu, press the ▼ (down) menu 
browse pushbutton to access the main menu options. 

2. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Operator is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 

3. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Operator menu options. 

4. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Adjust TOF is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 

5. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Adjust TOF menu options. 

6. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Rolling ASCII is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 

7. Press the Select pushbutton to print the test pattern. CLEAR to 
Stop will be displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. The printer will print a rolling test pattern of all 
printable ASCII characters. The pattern is printed in the font 
style, line length (determined by the margins), characters per 
inch, and lines per inch settings that are currently in effect 
(selected locally or remotely). 

8. Press the CLEAR pushbutton to stop printing test pattern. 



GEK-99044 



2-33 



Chapter 2. Getting Started 



9. Press On Line pushbutton to return the printer a local status or 
press CLEAR pushbutton move backward up to a previous level 
of selections. 




10. Press the On Line pushbutton again. This will return the printer 
to an online status. 

If printing becomes lighter gradually over a period of time, the ribbon 
may need replacing. 

See Figure 2-28 below for the print pattern sample using the default 
settings 

-p-rd«fH"'>:l"r:f-qr*tirriiiiH'J.i:i F">--iHa^- i .-# ■ , -. ■■L'ailWGi.T-.iv.i , ■ -i TiMCsKHWE >.!.«■:■* i**\ innii *£!.■. y -At *•'-*-- 
]"■. ■fco^rghijNiivvpqmbiiWK^-ll ^■-■iy-. > —'i ^Ti Htlll TtT:!'' ^"^^"^llJnJ T I J l If ll T J.Ilt HE .3'_ J— l_rjilj 
- . 'akiW* i >lroHMTr,i,v; r ■ V- j --itm - 1 !*+■-, ' U I tWW *** I K*.> /: Wfi[i3EPC^L JfJj*jrWirUsHPVCL . !■■_■ it-c^K^J-.i jl 
, ' ■&:■» flhhjt lur^^r'm.c^w^.ytfi I j- ■ -#*s*' " ■■*-r ■ - . t U 1 Z34WV+ 1 i-T- ■ ^W[**3Jil>LttuW>«aTUWH-il-: \ 1 J _ *fcr:,a*-r u -. i > I 
*i . ^.rjT. i jL -tfu^.i^vwH^f ; t~ I VHI " * l*T h - L /eLi*«tair»+r I '-3- ■■■■KWrBKI JO-tWOTOflbT JphIVZ l> y-_- uo.-*Fjr, ■ jk I* 
■bed** 0* I > l*r.>[.>-i.t*--'"-hci. I Pi ~#f M ' I P#*i ■ . /GtZMMWii I - -J TWWnxrWI J LHtKPUK-U^ FpIEV 3^_' HiziMh-gJ-, 1 Jl W. 
-.- .HK.jh . jl ■ v WT ita"-->-PEl i J - " -#*St" < — l - . XQ IIHICVK-1 1 • NK1KECT-SI3 JHJMlP4ft£liJMrr VT I "i l"_ JbCMfp l > l.r.. 
s **^",> i.™ M ntir^r'iX[iJ-i-'JfL'r I p*^--jSaihxl-4fUJWiF4>>3#WCDCF U 7iE> LrhQf^tihrumi r2L • 1". iu*^. 
drftalk fr i— Kwa-pfcu-n: vrC I k~ " «**K3 ■ ■ jp-* . - . tto i:M»Wi 5 I ■ WtiE-CE4u=GU3 JU rftuf>uft£luuwi.-i2 Eh 3->_ ic^uJrf * ■ 

r'gh.ji i-TOflntavwi^fi ri 'f +7t ' i «*- ■ . ™i i:*^r*-*i. i -.*. ■ ♦*&■:& it a-j j _hH:f-cfl-iTddHiv:r-. i- . -ibaatpuhi j i. 

r-jh ■ > i-mncr-ahir-VFVTC I I - - - 4-kW ■ I >«-* . - . /412344UTO*tf I-l- i ^iHB£EC=iME JMj#rEiWu1iJvLa.-lL >. 3-_- tu^w. . jL" 

1* i j< ■■H ^ p.H r^M. i M iipj N I r i "MS* 1 Qi'r- .^tafHTDfi 1 ■: ».■■?** EC EEf-WlJLMUi?iKiTU.*dcvI L\ I J . \kr«T.H.F.jb I > l> 

k I > l^rri-p-TT-tiTrbiLvxC : 3*1 "*«» ' I F*+, - . ftlCMQUUtii I - -.- -*HtCE-CKi-HC J-irt+If-MIl ukya /IE ■. V .. ikjjlhlPgti . ii i - 

i jk IvKqsqrakuvmkvx-l I F ■ I "#»**' i If-. - ..":n*i4E*7H>i 14- ■■■hMb^CEr-Shl *LJWJ?-uKiTLMdCT;:: -. l-_ 'tun hi* . ± im^e-f^tr- 

> l«TV»f^^tiwkKy3-ti 3- i -i*J ■ 4 l*+.-,^ l H*J*rj«. I ■ . ■ ta^nf Ffrnl i l nttfiW IHMivZI^ *■_■ ifccdkirghn jfc Irm^qr.t^S, 

fcinfup^rabiiA^rJi r , - , **Xfe' " >■+■ - . ^0 lt****Tfrr, I. . s--WKE4r'Vt1= JKL^O'iP-aiUi-VJHri^ 3 a _-«butar^M > NrrK-^tlL-r^-t 

■ ■».. h i-,.-. l..™ . X r i : i- ■ -mti < i-i-f r- . y^| i y&nffr i ..;. ■■*«iCErF»*l j.i_i«OiMi»rrjyHIVZE^ ?*■_ '-abedvf gk ^Jkr lBnop£p-«tJu.ufcY 
— JPh>-»tfj~PVt( ! J -1 -Pffcfc '!»-•+'-. ■■niSMK-TWi F \- ■ -AFeCUtr9\LJfLnKrWTUVHirTll\ ]■■_■ «fc«Hdaf-;h I _|l ti«HntdWf,z 
rHT-ara-yjh-v:^-! 1 r I 'iKl' ( )-■ I ■ .hTHZHWIPi \ ■ ^MECECPGM] jrJ.HMQP«STLHU>:n Es ] J _ -it-rdi-TiT, l> l^r.i|i>-p.l lVJ u.vl i" 
■:-p-a-i-tUrHsyiE I l T i "-rtt* ■ I !-•*, -.VuiiUCiTfivi I ■: «' ?**M&V(nl ^iy^a¥AbTu<nnvtt\ S-. ' lkhMlPWi-1 Jk ^-wqitAiWHnl I 
My-tii-i-KWH ■ k" ' ■■«*' i j»+ ■ - , -'01^^*547^1 ■<> ■ }*lfiK K^J >=LiH0^fiH1HW|-It\ J-_ -be*'* I .4 lp-«f-^ . ti-vy^yrE ! 1 
v-Mivu.veI :j>-*f34 ^l^+L-./oiEI^fK^CAElC-^TWllCEEFBiEJnj^iOPQnSPU^HPVZE^V.'i^KvFjhv^ !wr:-c.-q,nt iJ , u .- ,-■; : F 
i-BbuFHty*!.! r-'H^' LI^H' J . , niia40iW^I€-> : TMBt J :-CFi>UJ>iJ*<fTdFfi1UhW/i^ I- ■ 
««BWtfi«CI ri-iHIi 1 M** r -./OI2J«*?fl^n - .'^FXI*P^3^»*^ftS^>idevZ|-.l..-+bi*f6*.> !-niFCri^H;v^:r 
tifkUivxE! F^n^Hki' K»+.- nJ i(i(t*^ST:j? , .,i. . T a..:.«n^[ .■.-.F4*^ J j.: i :rij.Mivi[-. r-_ ifc^PgKnjKivHpqnbuvw^CI 3P I ■■ 
■^T"H i *■ i -"lii.- i ifc- ■ - , -T I T3 *W.rp» i iv. ■■?*raKEemO'i3 .*L»J^9iT-'W^W*3-r^ 3'_ •*\K4wT&- i >-1iirwp«ri tdrHiirxE I 3- J - ■■#* 
"i-vf-T: V -1 ""MP** ' i !♦+■-. /^L£**flW*i I '-CTfrUKEPETEJil J-JWOf^n^rLTpHIYlE^. 3*_ - ibc-MFgh-. > Iwdc^tb.^. # ii : k- 1 " "*«5 

u. V f;: pM'Mfci 1 "?*Ti-./n3z i M , M-Tpii:..,^cci:Ecni«iEJi h i m I iii h nmrrTiTr r it* ih rj iji i«in m«ii n.ii i(^i«i 

.y^^ !-■ ■*««■ ^ I-t.- p /oi rsjJH.T^^r | <->?KiKEKrW3 Jf1.Hr>3«4^?Tyj>FI4V7 E\ f- 'iKM^ i jk I jrafu^i. Eu-.uk r a 4 : F* i -■■»»■ 
Tfc1 : KT-'Mte.- I }<*+ i r , ,'0523-1 ^T-E": I C-3 ^4HECOPWEJk;LI^I0P«»-UiF.j f IE\ ] l _ - ■toiih'gr.-. jl ■tr^v\f-€^^m r B i: >"i 'i^f ■! 
x-Ei ri'#™- ■:•--• .J■.i:J41*7flP■l;>J^*UKKF^3J'LlM«^0«TLMW^Y^^h^-_ .kft::D»^hi> l-r^f.>-fc.Lu-..u.,c' ■ l-'""Jf Ik 

cij^'-Mfi^ 1 in™,-. rnrnPTkiTiffii '•-■±*ti--ntFinr.' -n*zf->Ai\Juini.iL- " ■-■— t— xr ■»>■— |-n— tj .i.^i i >■■-*«?■ . i+ 

I rl■ , #«Bi , O-m . /-:iJ;^ISiT^ie^->?HKuWaCPQH:.»-iJ»i,Vil«li.h-fciJLiri-.l- *E.-arfyp ■ jl i-r.mrjr-,,u, ■.-.-. h -r i n>«n|< ||Hi+ 
t~i -*VM ■ I h*TL, ./CiLU-tec.n^E I ■.-> 7*HiCBCPU-J JJ-lwlf-C-FriT-J-JHiVTE-. J- ... 'uuw'gi i > ■■HjMQ.'Hymyu-yti I |" > "M^" i Jt+ ■ 
■i-H*' |i«i... , uJi^^T4r?jFH.:^-*«EJ4u^iiHrj-.Lr»*-*'Crt-Ei.iiiii3HTi:- V- ^ x.HiK.jr. i.|L !-- aA --y|'-i1^i---r- hr1 : J" ' 'II^l- < |4+ P - 

I -iKU,' ( l^+r— >*l«4?t7^-| I i - >^KKF^ JCP-LWH^^TwtKvi.: ^ j'_ >b^4rr>i I > ippspan-turymvxE I 3">^ "*TO*' I M« I - . 
-Hk*' I k*4-7--70kjat#ijmJ| P<-ii' ^ M ra g>-ECJl4j , H:f *WLL UTMP i 1 ; [ ■ J--.rt^BcNrfqh-jH™siw-4uUh¥v 1 r = ii n'HJV -:i-i i-« ^^ 
'*»' riM-h-.rtWiTiJB*?^! ih ■ :-+4*WWf=**1E .■■:L , *Jrc"7Pj , *J-« i 'ir S 3"_ *tfzitr r ^ -j* I-Twwntiwisx r = l _ l "- H-L5- - 1 1 ■ ■ i ./0 
*YA • 4 M+.r.V-trltMSdTWF I (-> , N«KEP'r'JKlJH.rPI04^1lf5IWfflIT7JEH 3"-_ ■ pbaPjpTgl I > lF^-:-p-^iib'Jry? r 3 .'. ! I" ■ 'HKV i jp.' ■ - . fill 
Mi 1 i >m- . - , J0li*«teTy- | r< . ; -ibBrScr Q1E *Ll M HC4-^^■S^u«l!^.YIE^ J*- - #fcc**r-3tii jk ii-«iin-.T,i.- r i I i k ' " J *i4^i. ^ i « - -jOI 1 
± ■ < 1*4 r- -yri ^ ]<447q^i i ■■■ >TtaK[KF^H3 .AU u Wb3i'«.^HjyMi™ , E\ 3'_ 'dbodWtfi i jk Inkp^vtimu^xl ! J" ■ 44 ii ' I jp+, -. .iiilj 

■ HHH-,~,.'r.3rH4.-L : Ttn : | .; "■MKEETuFII Jl ^-F»P0IKTlI«lk7IEM*- ■ MbeaaFghi jl l,irr^nvi(tu.ui r x-l : k^-ii!L' r - 0»> -.^St 
--*---. 'C1234M-7IH-1 1 ■ ■ --HMHltEC-.^U J»l_"fiur-b¥ilLh-W>:iiL'. ]■■_ 'iDcd^r. iji lH^qnuvJt^ [! I ■ -J«:-. ■ ■: i-i-i .-. -ii jj^ 

!+-'t- J /i:'LZ>*V J 7fltcl':->7fli^:EfcFl^l J..PP*:*-C4fiTu-jyeviri- 1 k^ „ .U>;.i*K.jK . * I-™,., f-^hv-" ■■■.-r : i-'i-i-u:- I -.**-,-> /D3ZHBc- 
«, - . .'uJiiMBiTi-Jd l4.L--7UtKJ4Vi-.-ii ■■ I ,■». > uh iiTijfcvs h£i.-- r_- 4t>cdki^i I jH i fpqnhiWK^ll r I '*KH ' <!-■•■ -jOI II-Wj? 
-!■■■ ./■:■ Uh3 -^HiPiir;! 1, «.- -^^r^.r^r^Hi . ilih^v^ « W-"^* I ^ J*. -ibc4rf g> ■J' i"HOTTtiwin[ I 3--: "MM ' I k—, - . i:>Jk23HRUJA 
. - . rOLi m-*TS«. i < .> 'iPAi-KiHJujHi ■ ,"**:#■■ ^FrLrpmY IE- 3*-' tbDdkjrghi ^ I^T-^Hr"t'j--.:-rX-; I r " -HX*' I J»« . - . .-Til Ii341fc7£r?- 
-.-■flqgjllc-Ttf i ^^-Wf^wttyWI uWJ iUJF 1 WA^ U WH. TIEET. 3-- ■■abLMt>Tgh1 -Mi-^ntiWhrar. I - - ' "Pliffii- ■: m n-..--:il j/*WTii*( 

■ "'I: ^w=k;v9«e I WWBCIZrQiXJVlWnKiliZTJ*tiiVll\ l J _ Jtr:ui-r ji i j. l«»p^-Htxir.. Y i; : I - ! J Hf*M ' I ?i-r . - . /n]±,^kj4.T^4 k 
■ , nj:M-M-tFi-.'--4ifflC-CFL>-l[J-L™:4:-uF-i1u4-hinplL- j--. • rf.-.^Kyr. I ii k)iM|HhUJHVIfl t-i-«-«e,- .■n+L-.mLiiiPjjrWcq.: 
■■I I7i5*nflF-i4 =>, ^KDCFflti] je>. PiWp^rfiETLMucv; [h j-_ ^Iw** • > ■--K >=f -m Jy u,: ¥C K : |- - #VW I ?. r, ■ . /<fi2 M»W E Fi- 
Jxy^KTtHil :■■ ' --wV^Mj+h ,m| .■■ l»*.*- ?"i:-iJ»-Hiyi.['. ]■_ " it-c*r^^ J' i ^-«j--*i-jj,^x r = 1 1 ^-|■|H^Mi , Q«. - .hOL^ J4--J-7y-;i -l • - , 
^*'«' I <->-KfftKKFifJi: ^LHfiarfliaTV*Ura^-. T -*i ikifj I JklHr>a<Kr«.tUrhui^ [a j- ■ - i*ii - i Fi+,-. .ULl--^F-.-hi.-v J i ■ ■ 
^f4UfWj|i<*>74Mk1314EP«IEJklJHuVGlPu^^ F ■ -i-ikV ■ -i - ■ - . .i. | ^kji^.Ttk , i r. 17* 
■•^^■7^ 1 1 ■ ■ ■ 7*aiCEtr«lE J- J.fvCPwPSTuhVXpTE ^ 3". .scrrawjr. ■ Jh '.i-^q.'V-v^h^: "i" 1 -bkx i r l4+.- r ^L7J44pM!n>E " ' -J -fJi 
"* , ?»' ' ^ -TJKKFU-] .• Lhk^POFrlTjVHPv: E-. l-_ i^dtlgi 1 ^ lriiui>a r -i.^» u .vl:< " V"--«SW !>*+.-, ^53I3'7d-TE>* : t 
*tf^if.>T%c«3MFlli4EJk:LrttaHajcmJrtiri3!r^^-.-|^^ P* i <*#*• • "*-h-. >v-| ; 34^73" 1 I ;■ 
^*M ■■-^'WiKIFJIS^LWagMftSTL^JlVj I ". I- . .kK^-flh 1 > l-^M-»tkJ-lHl^r i 1~" "WB- I r*+^ - ■ rQlf3HHm'a ! ■ - 
^■■|l:■■.'-*«M3l3:*^EJrLrl^04>«t1ufcHlvTr^ l^,. ■ ^^f^i- ■■ j« l—^^-Tiuj.^-Hi-i : |"i-«v - ■ "■ ■ ■ , 'ffLMtWi 

■! ■■ ■ -t"ECE4TrCJI3 ;'LHTiW*>nHk^ ^3 : ". I" . ^I..iJVijPii |L lanjMi4||MJKr I . I"' _ *Tti ■ 4 H + P _ . ^*? 1. 7JWJPK7W ■ I 

I I . -■^WGfraq^iJrKF-GKTihlJkYllEAIr.'ltaHtf'qfci p. l4kfpHJf4 y ita^i*Vl<l r'-Hi* 1 ■ i»* I - i "SSZWK-TGTl I* 

1 i ■ •■^uKECfOilE JPLIU^ tf'-jlU'iV:' P?L ■■ 1' , T^ifrr-.^ i fl. ^ ■ n. . j ■ -p -j ■■--■-;■ i; I i I'l-IHI i l*+p- ■ ■ | " " J^>- ? ' - ■ I I ■■ *i K C%. ' * ' 

FIGURE 2-31 PRINT PATTERN SAMPLE 



■ 7#AK 



5000 Series User's Manual 



2-34 



GEK-99044 



CHAPTER 3. OPERATING THE PRINTER 
PRINTER OPERATIONAL MODES 

■ ONLINE 

■ OFFLINE 

■ Fault State 

■ Menu 

Each printer state (mode) will display its own operational 
characteristics. These modes are defined as follows: 



Online 



Offline 



Fault 



Menu 



The online state is the normal operating mode of the printer where it 
is ready to accept data from the host. There are functional 
restrictions in this mode, to prevent interference with a print job that 
may be in progress. 



The offline state allows more operations including menu functions. 
This state is also referred to as Local. 



The fault state is a special case where a few options are available as 
the machine is in a condition that may inhibit many operations. It 
will allow operations that are required to clear the fault condition(s). 
The normal exit, when a fault is corrected, is to depress the Clear 
pushbutton. 



The menu state is where the settings or configuration of the printer 
may be altered. 

Status Display 

Depressing the Select pushbutton while online activates the status 
display. The LCD cycles through and displays the current printer 
settings, including Format, Font Style, Code Page, CPI, Interface, 
Printer Emulation and l/F Emulation. Press the Clear pushbutton to 
terminate this display. 



GEK-99044 



3-1 



Chapter 3 Operating the Printer 



MAIN MENU 



Main 



Operator 



The Main menu is organized in a tree structure. The active level is 
displayed on the upper left corner of the LCD display and selection 
options available displayed sequentially one at a time, on the lower 
right corner of the LCD display. 

The Main menu presents only the allowable (not hidden) top level 
selections, Operator menu, Setup menu, Maintenance menu and 
Menu Control. If a menu is locked from view only those menus setup 
for viewing will be displayed (See 'Menu Control", for further 
information.) The following menus are available from the Main menu 
level, if all menus are setup as accessible: 

■ Operator menu 

■ Setup menu 

■ Maintenance menu 

■ Menu Control (See "Menu Control" for procedures to view this 

menu.) 



Operator Menu 



Setup Menu 



The Operator menu is intended for the user who may need to make 
certain changes (i.e. selections) to the printer as the type of print job 
changes. Normally, the Operator menu involves loading paper, 
correcting faults, and allows temporary changes to settings that have 
previously been selected in the Setup menu. If the selection desired is 
not available in the Operator menu, proceed to the Setup menu. For 
procedures to navigate the operator menu, see Chapter 4. For a 
complete listing of menu selections, see Operator Menu Map in 
Appendix I. 



The Setup menu contains a more complete menu than the Operator 
menu. The Setup menu allows configuration settings in the printer to 
be changed and saved. Some setting are selected, enabled or user set 
For procedures to navigate the setup menu, see Chapter 5. For a 
complete listing of menu selections, see Setup Menu Map in 
Appendix I. 



Maintenance Menu 



The Maintenance menu contains selections for hardware setup, such 
as checking and resetting of counters, etc. For procedures on 
navigating the maintenance menu, see Chapter 6. For a complete 
listing of menu selections, see Maintenance Menu Map in Appendix I. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



3-2 



GEK-99044 



Menu Control 



The Menu control feature allows the operator to restrict/ allow access 
to the other menus, Operator, Setup and Maintenance. This menu is 
only visible after using the following procedure during power up: 

■ Simultaneously depress the On Line pushbutton and the f 
pushbutton while turning the power on to the printer. 

The printer will power up as normal, however, when accessing the 
menu options, a fourth menu, Menu Control will be viewable and 
accessible. 



SETTING UP A FORMAT 



Active Format 



Setting up the physical boundaries and other parameters of a format 
consists of setting the format name, font style, character set, country, 
CPI, LPI, form length, top margin, bottom margin, left margin, right 
margin, top print ref, horizontal expansion, vertical expansion, 
vertical expansion options, printing modifiers, print options and slew 
rate. 

Although the entire length of the form is available for printing, some 
combination of a top and bottom margin or a bottom margin and 
offset is recommended to avoid printing on the paper perforation and 
possibly snagging print wires. 

NOTE 

Up to ten stored set up configurations (formats) may be stored 

for later recall using the Format pushbutton on the control 

panel. Each format should have a unique name. 



An active format is the format description, set of set up parameters 
that presently resides in the printer's processor. When printing 
starts, these active formats are used to format the page. 

The active format can be a description that was entered through the 
control panel, sent from the host, or one of the stored formats 
selected. The active format is labeled ACTIVE on the status page 
printout. 



GEK-99044 3-3 Chapter 3 Operating the Printer 



Setting up an Active Format 

An active format can be set up using the following three methods: 

■ From the Setup menu, under Modify Format menu, the Form 

Length, Top and Bottom Margin, etc may be saved. 

■ From the Operator menu options, use the Select Format to select 

a stored format description. 

■ ANSI Emulation - use the ESC[pl;p2;p3r escape sequence to set 

the active form length, top margin, and bottom margin. (See the 
Programmer's Manual for information on escape sequences.) 

Note 

See "Stored Formats" for additional information. 



Form Length 



Top Margin 



Bottom Margin 



Top Print Ref 



Form length is set using the currently set lpi (lines per inch) value. If 
the form length is set to 66 lines while the lpi is set at 6, the length 
will be 1 1 inches. After the form length has been set up, a lpi change 
will not change the form length. 

The minimum form length is .33 inch (8.4mm, 240 decipoints) and 
the maximum length is 22 inches (559mm, 15,840 decipoints). 



The top margin is set using the currently set lpi value. If the top 
margin is set to 6 lines while the lpi is set to 6, printing will start on 
line 7. Lines 1-6(1 inch) will be skipped. After the form has been set 
up, a lpi change will not alter the length of the margin. 



The bottom margin is set using the currently set lpi value. If the 
bottom margin is set to 57 lines while the lpi is set to 6, the last 
printable line will be line 57. Lines 58 - 66 (1.5 inch) on an 1 1-inch 
form will be skipped. After the form has been set up, a lpi change will 
not alter the length of the margin. 



The top print ref (top print reference) is set using the currently set lpi 
value. If the offset distance is set to 6 lines while the lpi is set to 6, 
printing will start on line 7. Lines 1-6(1 inch) will be skipped. The 
offset occurs once each time the top of form position is set using the 
pushbutton on the control panel. After the form has been set up, a lpi 
change will not alter the length of the offset distance. 

The top print ref should not be confused with a top margin. They are 
distinctly different and serve separate functions. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



3-4 



GEK-99044 



1 in. 



Top of Form ■ 
Top Margin ■ 



Line 



8 1/2 in. 



Bottom Margin ► 

1 1/2 in. 
End of Form ► -^ — 



Sample Form 



Numbers 
00 

06 



57 



66 



Explanation of the Top Print Ref 

The Top Print Ref feature is used mainly with preprinted forms. 
Certain application programs immediately start printing data on the 
first form with no consideration for where the form is positioned. In 
the past, the person loading paper was responsible for positioning the 
form so that the first printed line fell in the correct place on the form 
(perforation 2.5 inches above the alignment pointers in the upper 
tractors for the green forms, 1 inch above the alignment pointers for 
paychecks, etc.). 

Using the top print ref allows loading all forms and paper with the 
perforation at the alignment pointers. 

The host program will print the first form and then move the paper to 
the same position on the next form using vertical move commands 
(line feed, form feed, etc.). This will continue through the box of forms 
to be printed. 

The Top Print Ref is used to position the string of forms to the first 
print line on the first form. The host is then responsible for advancing 
the paper to the next form's first print line with form feed commands. 

Example 

To print standard data listings, the operator selects an 1 1-inch form at 
6 lpi, with no top or bottom margins. The date, which is the first 
printed data on each page, is supposed to land 1 inch below the top 
of the form (perforation). TOF has been set with the perforation at the 
alignment pointers. 

When the application program starts, the date is printed on the first 
line of the form, not 1 inch from the perforation. The program prints 
the first page and advances the forms to the second page. The second 
page is also printed with the date at the perforation. 

This cannot be compensated for with a top margin, since a margin 
affects every form by subtracting from the printable area. A top 



GEK-99044 



3-5 



Chapter 3 Operating the Printer 



margin would effectively add to the space that the host uses to go 
from form to form. 

In the following illustrations, the application program knows to print 
54 lines of data (9 inches at 6 lpi) and then advance the paper 12 
lines (2 inches at 6 lpi) before printing the next form. This will 
continue until the print job is finished. 

Papers, in both examples, were loaded with the perforation at the 
alignment pointers of the upper tractors. 

Without the offset (Example A), the data printed starts at the first 
printable line of the form. The paper should have been loaded with 
the perforation 1 inch above the pointers for the desired results. 

Example B shows the effect of the special offset (top print ref) on the 
print job. The offset (1 inch) was stored in a format description and 
paper was loaded with the perforation at the alignment pointers. 













EXAMPLE A 



EXAMPLE B 



5000 Series User's Manual 



3-6 



GEK-99044 



LOW PAPER PRINTING 



Low paper printing allows replenishing the forms supply without 
losing data or forms registration. 

This printer will print to the end of the current form or to the end of 
the last form (end of paper) after sensing a low paper condition if the 
form length corresponds with the active page length. 

Note 

If the print job has been using reverse paper moves (backing paper 
up while using bar codes, oversize, or vertical moves, do not use the 

low paper printing feature. Once the paper runs out of the lower 

tractors, poor print quality and jams will occur. A form length of 12.5 

inches or longer causes the printer to bypass the low paper fault. The 

printer will go to a paper out condition. 



Low Paper 



Paper Almost Out 



Local 



Low Paper 
Menu 



Local 



Low Paper 
Status 



Paper Out 



When the paper supply runs down to approximately 12.5 inches 
(32cm) remaining, the paper out sensor is activated. The alarm light 
will flash and Paper Almost Out will display in the upper left corner of 
the display. 



1. Press the Clear pushbutton. Local will be displayed in the upper 
line of the display window and Low Paper Menu will be 
displayed in the lower line of the display window. 

2. Press the On Line pushbutton and the printer will finish the 

remainder of the current form and stop. Local will be displayed 
in the upper line of the display window and Low 

Paper Status will be displayed in the lower line of the display. 
The printer will finish the remainder of the current form and 
stop. 

3. The alarm light will flash and Paper Out will display in the upper 
left corner of the display. 

4. Replenish the paper supply in the printer. (See "Replenishing 

Paper Supply for additional information.) The printer will finish 
the job inside the printer buffer when the printer is replenished 
with paper and back online with the appropriate form settings. 
(See "Setting TOF" for additional information.) 



Replenishing Paper Supply 

If the operator wants to change forms or paper: 



Online 



Status 



1. With the printer in the online status, press the FF (form feed) 
pushbutton to eject the remaining forms out of the upper 
tractors. (If Paper Out is displayed in the upper left corner of the 
display window, press FF (form feed) pushbutton to eject the 
remaining form out of the upper tractors.) 

2. Load a fresh supply of paper/ forms and return the print gap 
wheel to the proper setting. If necessary, see "Loading Paper" in 
Chapter 1. 



GEK-99044 



3-7 



Chapter 3 Operating the Printer 



3. Use the f and/or j arrow pushbuttons to make final adjustments 
to the perforation's position. 

4. Press TOF pushbutton and place the printer Online. (If necessary, 
see Setting Top of Form.) 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton to clear the fault displays. 

6. Press the On Line pushbutton to place the printer online. 



SETTING TOP OF FORM 



Setting the top of form tells the printer where the top of form position 
(perforation) is located on the paper. 

Use the following procedures to set the top of form. 

1 . The paper perforation must first be positioned at the pointer on 
each of the upper tractor doors. See Figure 3-1. 

2. Position the paper using the f pushbutton and/ or [ 
pushbuttons, if necessary. 

3. Press the TOF pushbutton. After the perforation is positioned at 
the pointers and the TOF pushbutton is pressed, the printer will 
move the paper so that the paper is correctly positioned at the 
print wires for printing. Press the On Line pushbutton to place 
the printer online. 



PAPER PERFORATION 




FIGURE 3-1 PAPER PERFORATION CORRECTLY 

POSITIONED BETWEEN UPPER TRACTORS 

5050/5100 (55 OR 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

Note 

To ensure proper printing integrity, do not print within 1/8 inch 

of perforations. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



3-8 



GEK-99044 



PAPER TEAR-OFF FEATURE 

Pressing the Tear Off pushbutton starts the paper tear-off feature 
cycle. 

This feature moves the paper forward, out of the printer, far enough 
to tear off the last printed form at its perforation. Tearoff will show in 
the display. After a 15-second delay, the beeper will sound a warning. 
The paper then retracts back into the printer and is positioned at the 
print wires ready to print. 

Pressing the Tear Off pushbutton a second time during this cycle will 
cancel the 15-second delay and immediately retract the paper. 

This feature will not work during a fault condition such as Ribbon 
Jam or Strikr Bar Open. 

Paper Path (5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model Only) 

The distance the forms are ejected and retracted depends on which 
paper path (top exit or rear exit) is being used. (See TearOff menu 
option in chapter 5.) 



Number of Forms Ejected 



This feature works by performing a series of forward form feeds to 
eject the paper and a shorter series of reverse form feeds to reposition 
the paper. It is designed to prevent the paper from being backed out 
of the upper tractors. Since paper is needed in the tractors above the 
print wires, that form(s) can not be printed. (See Special Forms 
below.) 

The charts on the following pages show the number of forward form 
feeds (or forms ejected), the number of forms retracted (reverse form 
feeds), and the approximate amount of paper retracted for a given 
form length. 



GEK-99044 3-9 Chapter 3 Operating the Printer 



Special Forms 



When using special forms like labels on a carrier, the menu option 
Retract under TearOff sub-menu option allows full retraction of 
forms. If the carrier is not torn off, it can be fully retracted so the first 
form can be used. (See Using Set Up Menu for more information.) 

Rear Paper Exit Tear-off (All Models) 
Calculated Ejection and Retraction Chart 



FORM LENGTH 
(INCHES) 


NUMBER OF 
FORMS EJECTED 


NUMBER OF FORMS 
RETRACTED 


INCHES 
RETRACTED 


0.5 


34 


22 


11 


1.0 


17 


11 


11 


1.5 


12 


8 


12 


2.0 


9 


6 


12 


2.5 


7 


4 


10 


3.0 


6 


4 


12 


3.5 


5 


3 


10.5 


4.0 


5 


3 


12 


4.5 


4 


2 


9 


5.0 


4 


2 


10 


5.5 


4 


2 


11 


6.0 


3 


2 


12 


6.5 


3 


2 


13 


7.0 


3 


2 


14 


7.5 


3 


2 


15 


8.0 


3 


2 


16 


8.5 


2 




8.5 


9.0 


2 




9 


9.5 


2 




9.5 


10.0 


2 




10 


10.5 


2 




10.5 


11.0 


2 




11 


11.5 


2 




11.5 


12.0 


2 




12 


12.5 


2 




12.5 


13.0 


2 




13 


13.5 


2 




13.5 


14.0 


2 




14 


14.5 


2 




14.5 


15.0 


2 




15 


15.5 


2 




15.5 


16.0 


2 




16 


16.5 


2 




16.5 


17.0 







11 


17.5 










18.0 










18.5 










19.0 










19.5 










20.0 










20.5 










21.0 










21.5 










22.0 











5000 Series User's Manual 



3-10 



GEK-99044 



Top Paper Exit Tear-off (5050/5100 55 dBa Cabinet Model Only) 
Calculated Ejection and Retraction Chart 



FORM LENGTH 
(INCHES) 


NUMBER OF 
FORMS EJECTED 


INCHES 
EJECTED 


INCHES 
RETRACTED 


FORMS 
NOT USED 


0.5 


16 


8 


5 


6 


1.0 


8 


8 


5 


3 


1.5 


5 


8 


5 


2 


2.0 


4 


8 


4 


2 


2.5 


3 


8 


3 


2 


3.0 


2 


8 


5 


1 


3.5 


2 


8 


4.5 


1 


4.0 


2 


8 


4 


1 


4.5 


1 


8 


3.5 


1 


5.0 


1 


8 


3 


1 


5.5 


1 


8 


2.5 


1 


6.0 


1 


8 


2 


1 


6.5 


1 


8 


1.5 


1 


7.0 


1 


8 


1 


1 


7.5 


1 


8 


.5 


1 


8.0 


1 


8 





1 


8.5 


1 


8.5 


-.5 


1 


9.0 


1 


9 


-1 


1 


9.5 


1 


9.5 


-1.5 


1 


10.0 


1 


10 


-2 


1 


10.5 


1 


10.5 


-2.5 


1 


11.0 


1 


11 


-3 


1 


11.5 


1 


11.5 


-3.5 


1 


12.0 


1 


12 


-4 


1 


12.5 


1 


12.5 


-4.5 


1 


13.0 


1 


13 


-5 


1 


13.5 


1 


13.5 


-5.5 


1 


14.0 


1 


14 


-6 


1 


14.5 


1 


14.5 


-6.5 


1 


15.0 


1 


15 


-7 


1 


15.5 


1 


15.5 


-7.5 


1 


16.0 


1 


16 


-8 


1 


16.5 


1 


16.5 


-8.5 


1 


17.0 


1 


17 


-9 


1 


17.5 


1 


17.5 


-9.5 


1 


18.0 


1 


18 


-10 


1 


18.5 


1 


18.5 


-10.5 


1 


19.0 


1 


19 


-11 


1 


19.5 


1 


19.5 


-11.5 


1 


20.0 


1 


20 


-12 


1 


20.5 


1 


20.5 


-12.5 


1 


21.0 


1 


21 


-13 


1 


21.5 


1 


21.5 


-13.5 


1 


22.0 


1 


22 


-14 


1 



Negative retraction numbers are forward paper moves. 



GEK-99044 



3-11 



Chapter 3 Operating the Printer 



LOCAL AUTO VIEW FEATURE 



Viewing 



Retracting 



The local auto view feature is used to view the last line printed 
through the glass in the top cover. 



This feature is activated using the View pushbutton from the control 
panel. Pressing the View pushbutton causes the paper to move up 
until the last printed line is at the pointers of the upper tractors. 



Pressing the View pushbutton a second time will cause the paper to 
move back down until it is positioned at the print wires ready for 
printing. Receipt of any data will also retract the paper to the print 
position. 



USING THE MENU CONTROL MENU 



Main Menu 

Menu Control 



Allow Menus 



Operator 



This menu is only viewable after following special procedures during 
power up. 

Use the following procedure to view the Menu Control menu and 
select this option: 

■ Simultaneously depress the FF pushbutton and the f pushbutton 
while turning the power on to the printer. The printer will power 
up as normal. 

Note 

Keep the FF pushbutton and | pushbutton depressed until the 
power-up sequence is complete. 

1. Press the On Line pushbutton to place the printer in a Local 
(offline) status. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the main 
menu. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Menu Control is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to access the Menu Control options. 
Allow Menus will be displayed in the lower right corner of the 
display window. 

5. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Allow 
Menus options. 

6. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired menu is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 

7. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable the viewing of a 
menu. The < symbol immediately follows an enabled menu. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



3-12 



GEK-99044 



8. Cycle the power to the printer. After the power-up sequence is 
complete, only the enabled menu views will be viewable and 
accessible. 

Note 

If all the menus, Operator, Set Up and Maintenance are 

restricted from viewing, when the power cycle is complete, no 

menu will be visible from the Local menu level. Repeat the steps 

in this section to access Menu Control Menu and re-configure 

the menu viewing options. 



GEK-99044 3-13 Chapter 3 Operating the Printer 



CHAPTER 4. USING THE OPERATOR MENU 



Main 



Operator 



While in Local, press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton until 
Operator menu is displayed in the bottom right corner of the LCD. 
Main will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

To move up or down a level of menu options, press the ▲ (up) or T 
(down) menu browse pushbuttons. To move laterally among options 
on the same level, use the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbuttons. 

Currently selected (or active) menu options are displayed in the LCD 
with a < symbol, which follows immediately to the right of the menu 
option. Some menu options are toggle options and reflect an enabled 
or disabled condition. Press the Select pushbutton to cause the 
printer to perform this operation. 

As necessary, a graphic representing the LCD is shown to the left of 
text for clarity. 

Press the Clear pushbutton to return to the upper level menu or to 
Local when in a first-level menu. 



NEW RIBBON 



Operator 



New Ribbon 



New Ribbon 

Select to Reset 



1 . When a new ribbon is placed in the printer, the operator can reset 
the ribbon counter. This option is only available when Ribbon 
Monitor is enabled through the Maintenance Menu. (See "Ribbon 
Monitor" in Chapter 6 for procedures.) 

2. Use the following procedures to access the new ribbon option: 

3. While in the Operator menu, press T (down) to access Select to 
Reset. New Ribbon is displayed in the upper left corner of the 
LCD and Select to Reset is displayed in the lower right corner. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to reset the counter. 



SELECT FORMAT 



This menu option allows the operator to select a previously saved 
format. When a format is saved, the format name is user set. The first 
format name is Default unless changed in the Setup Menu. Only the 
formats changed from default settings will appear in the Operator 
Menu. See "Stored Formats" in Chapter 5 for procedures. 

Note 

Pressing the Format pushbutton allows the operator to select a 
format using the control panel. 

For example, if a format for a picking label is saved as Pick Ticket, 
the name Pick Ticket will be displayed as one of the formats available 
for selection. There is a limit often saved formats. (Default in the 
example below is used in place of the name Pick Ticket.) 



GEK-99044 



4-1 



Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



Operator 

Select Format 



Select Format 



Default 



Use the following procedures to select a saved format: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Select Format is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the saved 
formats. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
saved format desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a saved format. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the saved format, indicating 
the currently selected format. 



FONT STYLE 



Operator 



Font Style 



There are eleven font styles available for selection. See Operator 
Menu Map in Appendix I for Font Styles available. 

Use the following procedures to select a font style: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Font Style is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the font 
styles. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
font style desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a font style. The < symbol 
will now immediately follow the font style, indicating the currently 
selected font style. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-2 



GEK-99044 



CHAR SET/COUNTRY 



The character map consists of 256 characters (0X00 - 00XFF). Using 
the Country (OX00-OX7F) and Character Set (0X80-OXFF) and 
options allows the operator to select the upper and lower ends of the 
character maps respectively (See example character set below.) Under 
the Char Set/ Country, there are two sub-menus, Character Set and 
Country. (See Operator Menu Map in Appendix I for selections 
available.) 



COUNTRY 



CHAR SET 





■.• 


: 


:■ 


z 


■1 


r- 


:- 


7 





t* 


w- 




■' 


■• 


-■ 


i 


F 


t 


a 


4 


i 


1 


ii 


- 


r. 


Q 


:■ 


B 


t 


* 


2 


I: 


R 


b 


•■ 


a 


V 


■ 


4 


:•■ 


L 


c 


r 


- 


A 


* 


1 


* 


4 


P 


T 


d 


?. 


Zt 


* 


'■ 


% 


T. 


h 


i 


H 


L. 


& 


* 


- 


:; 


C- 


\- 


V 


f 


V 


7 


n 


1 




J 


i 


Lv 


9 


w 


Sf 


n 


T 


i 


i 


i' 


K 


h 


^ 


9 


a 


1 


i 


o 


T 


T 


t 


V 


A 


F. 


■• 


1 


1 


^l 


Z 


J 


r 


:•: 


? 


•■- 


t 


A 


h: 


L 


i- 


4 


C 


1 


" 


i 


< 


L 


> 


\ 




D 


f 


** 


- 


- 


n 


J 


y 


1 


E 


h 


* 


. 


> 


N 


■ 


t. 


r " 


F 


* 


T 


,' 


7 


^ 


- 


" 


L> 



Character Set 



Operator 

CharSet/Country 



CharSet/Country 

Character Set 



Character Set 

USA CP 437< 



This menu allows selection of the character (0X80 to 0XFF) of the 
character map. 

When using the Proprinter emulation, international character sets 
must be selected using escape sequences from the host. See 
Programmer's Manual for more information on international character 
sets and character charts. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until CharSet/Country is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the □ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
character set sub-menu. CharSet/Country will be displayed in the 
upper left corner of the LCD and Character Set will be in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the □ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
character set options. CharacterSet will be displayed in the upper 
left corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
character set desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

5. Press the Select pushbutton to select a character set. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the character set, indicating 
the currently selected character set. 



GEK-99044 



4-3 



Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



Country 



Operator 

CharSet/Country 



Char Set/Country 
Country 



Country 



USA ISO< 



This menu allows selection of the characters (0X00 to 0X7F) of the 
character map. 

Use the following procedures to select a country: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until CharSet/Country is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
country sub-menu. CharSet/Country will be displayed in the 
upper left corner of the LCD and Country will be in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
country options. Country will be displayed in the upper left corner 
of the LCD. 

4. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
country desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

5. Press the Select pushbutton to select a country. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the country, indicating the currently 
selected country. 



SELECT CPI 



Operator 



Select CPI 



Select CPI 



10< 



This menu option allows the operator to select or define a CPI 
(characters per inch) setting. See Operator Menu Map in Appendix I 
for CPI settings available. 

Use the following procedures to select a CPI setting: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Select CPI is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the CPI 
settings. Select CPI will be displayed in the upper left corner of 
the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
CPI setting desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a CPI. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the CPI, indicating the currently selected 
CPI. 



Select CPI (User Set) 



Select CPI 

10.0 User Set 



The current CPI setting will appear in the LCD. This option allows the 
user to set a non-standard CPI. 

Use the following procedures to set a non-standard CPI: 

1. While in Select CPI menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until 10.0 User Set is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-4 



GEK-99044 



Select CPI 



10.0 



2. Press the Select pushbutton to select this feature. Notice the 
cursor (underline) beneath the currently selected digit to be 
changed. 

3. In User Set mode the display switches to a format where the 
operator may enter any value to 9 for any numeric position. The 
four menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. 
The horizontal M ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



SELECT LPI 



Operator 



Select LPI 



Select LPI 



6< 



This menu option allows the operator to select or define a LPI (lines 
per inch) setting. See Operator Menu map in Appendix I for LPI 
settings available for selection. 

Use the following procedures to select a LPI setting: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Select LPI is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the LPI 
settings. Select LPI will be displayed in the upper left corner of the 
LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
LPI setting desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a LPI. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the LPI, indicating the currently selected 
LPI. 



Select LPI (User Set) 



Select LPI 



06 User Set 



Select LPI 



06 



The current LPI setting will appear in the LCD. This option allows the 
user to set a non-standard LPI. 

Use the following procedures to set the LPI to a non-standard LPI: 

1. While in Select LPI menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until 06 User Set is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to select this feature. Notice the 
cursor (underline) beneath the currently selected digit to be 
changed. 



GEK-99044 



4-5 



Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



3. In User Set mode, the display switches to a format where the 
operator may enter any value to 9 for any position. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal A ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



INTERFACE 



Operator 



Interface 



The Interface menu allows the operator to select a specific type of 
interface the printer will be using. The factory default setting is 
multisource, which activates all interfaces. The multisource setting is 
sufficient for most applications. (See the Operator Menu Map in 
Appendix I for available selections.) 

Use the following procedures to select the interface type: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Interface is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
interface options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
interface type desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select an interface type. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the saved interface type. 



EMULATION 



Operator 



Emulation 



This menu is used to select a printer emulation. This printer can 
emulate (become functionally similar to) ANSI (4800), ANSI (4410), 
FX286e, IBM ProPrinter P300/600, DEC LG (Digital Branded models 
only), PSeries, DEC PPL3 (Digital Branded models only), and ESC/P2. 

Which emulation to use will depend on what control codes and 
escape sequences will be sent by the host. (See Programmer's Manual, 
for information on each emulation.) 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Emulation is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
emulation options. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-6 



GEK-99044 



3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
emulation desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select an emulation option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the saved emulation option. 



FILTER 



Operator 



Filter 



Filter 



Serial 



This menu option allows the operator to select an interface filter 
option. Multiple filters can be active as the port becomes active 
assuming three software loads: standard, SCS, and IPDS (QMS and 
IGP is included in standard and SCS software). The maximum 
multiple filters is three. Hexdump has the lowest selection priority. 

Note 

QMS and IGP are mutually exclusive. Selecting the menu option 

"None" deactivates all interface filters. SCS is only selectable on 

Expansion ports if the software is installed. 

See the Operator Menu Map in Appendix I for a complete listing of 
the selections available. 

Use the following procedures to select a filter option: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Filter is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Filter 
options. Filter will be displayed in the upper left corner of the 
LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
filter desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a filter option. The < symbol 
will now immediately follow the saved filter option. 

The following describes the options available: 



Serial 



Filter 



Serial 



Serial 



None< 



This menu is used to configure the serial filter options. Activate this 
option only on RS232C serial port. 

Note 

IGP and QMS are mutually exclusive options. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the Filter menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Serial is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select or T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access 
the Serial options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 



GEK-99044 



4-7 



Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



4. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



Parallel! 1284) 



Filter 



Parallel (1284) 



Parallel (1284) 



None< 



This menu is used to configure the parallel (1284) filter options. 
Configure this filter option only on 1284 parallel port. 

Note 

IGP and QMS are mutually exclusive options. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the Filter menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Parallel (1284) is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select or T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access 
the Parallel (1284) options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-8 



GEK-99044 



Expansion 1 / Expansion2 

This menu is used to select the expansion 1 or Expansion2 options. 

Note 

IGP and QMS are mutually exclusive options. SCS and IPDS are 

also mutually exclusive options and are dependent on the 

software loaded in the printer. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. 



Filter 



Expansion 1 



Expansion 1 



None< 



While in the Filter, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbutton until either Expansion 1 or Expansion 1 is displayed 
in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select or T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access 
the Expansionl or Expansion2 options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



SHOW 



Operator 



Show 



Show 



Software IDs 



This menu option allows the operator to view or print various printer 
settings. See the Operator Menu map in Appendix I for a complete 
listing of selections available. 

Use the following procedures to view or print the printer settings: 

1. While in Operator Menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Show is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the show 
options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to select a show option. The 
following describes each selection available. 



GEK-99044 



4-9 



Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



Software IDs 



This option displays the part or version number of the installed 
software. This is a view only option. When selected, the display will 
automatically cycle and display information similar to the following 
display example: 

TTMI: 44A105004 

Font: 44A 100071 

CCU: 44A105086 

Panl: 44A 119255 

XXXY: < Revision Number > * 

* XXXY: are board identifiers, where XXX is the option board 
installed, Y is the expansion slot number and < Revision Number> is 
additional information (i.e. part number if applicable.) 



Expansion Slot Information 


Option Board Installed 


Board Identifier 


Legacy Parallel (Centronics, DP Short, DP Long) 


Legl: or Leg2: 


Ethernet (any speed) or Token Ring 


Netl: or Net2: 


empty or unknown board 


Exp 1 : or Exp 2 : 


IBM front end board 


Fepl: or Fep2: 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-10 



GEK-99044 



Sample Status Page 



Selecting this option will print the current settings of the printer. 
Press the Clear pushbutton to stop printing. The following two pages, 
Figure 4-2a and 4-2b, are a sample printout of the status page, 
reflecting the factory default settings with standard software 
installed. 



GEK-99044 4-1 1 Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



Status Page 5000 
Operator 

Active Format DEFAULT 

Font Style Data Proces 

CharSet/Country USA CP 437 USA ISO 

CPI 10 

LPI 6 

Interface Multi Source 

Emulation ANSI(4800) 

Filter 

None 
Software IDs 

TTMI:44A105072 
Font: 44A1 00082 
CCU :44A1 05086 
Panl:44A1 19255 
Exp1 : (empty) 
Exp2: (empty) 
Set Up 

Active Format 

Format Name DEFAULT 
Font Style Data Proces 
CharSet/Country USA CP 437 USA ISO 
CPI 10 

LPI 6 

By IN By Decipoint 

Form Length 11.00 7920 

Top Margin 

Bottom Margin 1 1 .00 7920 

Left Margin 

Right Margin 13.20 9504 

Top Print Ref 

Left Print Ref 

Horiz Expansion X1 
Vert Expansion X1 
VertExp Options Default (top) 
Print Modifiers 

DoubleStrike Disable 
Emphasized Disable 
Print Options 

Uppercase Disable 
High Speed Enable 
Slew Rate Normal 
Horiz Tab 
None 
Vertical Format Vertical Tabs 
Vert Tab 
Nome 
InterfaceSettgs 

MultiSource Delay Seconds006 
Parallel Setup 

No Fault PO&OFF Disable 
Serial 

XON/XOFF 

Ready/Busy Disable 
ON/OFFIine Disable 
Fault Enable 
Robust XOFF Disable 
Robust XON Disable 
CD(DTR) 

Ready/Busy Enable 
ON/OFFIine Enable 
Fault Enable 
CA(RTS) 



FIGURE 4-2a (SAMPLE STATUS PAGE 1) 



5000 Series User's Manual 4-12 GEK-99044 



Ready/Busy 


Disable 


ON/OFFIine 


Disable 


Fault Disable 


SCA(SRTS) 




Ready/Busy 


Enable 


ON/OFFIine 


Enable 


Fault Enable 


ETX/ACK Disable 


Inhibit Xmit Disable 


Lead Polarity 




CD(DTR) 


High 


CA(RTS) 


High 


SCA(SRTS) 


High 


CB(CTS) 


High 


CC(DSR) 


High 


Data Bits 8 Bits 


Parity No 1 


Parity Bit 


Stop Bits 1 




Baud Rate 9600 


Buffer Options High Trip Pt % 80 


PI Lead Disable 


Expansion 1 




None 




Expansion2 




None 




Engine Options 




Direction Bi-directional 


EngineOff Delay 2 seconds 


Print Intensity 


Normal 


Print Control 




Define LF 


LF = CR + LF 


Define CR 


CR = CR 


Define FF 


FF = CR + FF 


Define HT 


NoTabs = Space 


VertMove 


VM = CR + VM 


AutoWrap 


Enable 


FF @ TOF 


Enable 


GenPtrOpts 






12 3 




1 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2 


Group 1 


01 1 00001 0001 00000000000000000000 


Group 2 


0001 001 1 001 1 1 0000000000000000000 


TearOff 




Path 


Rear 


Retract 


Next TOF 


Auto 


Disable 


Emulation ANSI (4800) 


SFCC 


1B(27) 




12 3 




1 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2 


Options 


00000000010000000000000000000000 


Filter 




None 




Maintenance 




Power On Time 00000:00:00 


Print Time 00000:00:00 


Memory Usage 




RAM Size 8192 kB 




Code Size 2318 kB 




Heap Used 718 kB 




Free Mem 5155 kB 





RibbonMonitor Disable 



FIGURE 4-2b (SAMPLE STATUS PAGE 2) 



GEK-99044 4-13 Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



Sample Format Page 



Selecting this option will print a description of optional pre-saved 
format (also known as a form.) Press the Clear pushbutton to stop 
printing. See Figure 4-3. 



Formats 



Active Format 






Format Name 


DEFAULT 




Font Style 


Data Proces 




CharSet/Country 


USA CP 437 


USA ISO 


CPI 


10 




LPI 


6 






By IN 


By Decipoint 


Form Length 


11.00 


7920 


Top Margin 








Bottom Margin 


11.00 


7920 


Left Margin 








Right Margin 


13.20 


9504 


Top Print Ref 








Left Print Ref 








Horiz Expansion 


X1 




Vert Expansion 


X1 




VertExp Options 


Default (top) 




Print Modifiers 






Doublestrike 


Disable 




Emphasized 


Enable 




Print Options 






Uppercase 


Disable 




High Speed 


Enable 




Slew Rate Normal 




Stored Formats 






Format Name 


DEFAULT 




Font Style 


Data Proces 




CharSet/Country 


USA CP 437 


USA ISO 


CPI 


10 




LPI 


6 






By IN 


By Decipoint 


Form Length 


11.00 


7920 


Top Margin 








Bottom Margin 


11.00 


7920 


Left Margin 








Right Margin 


13.20 


9504 


Top Print Ref 








Left Print Ref 








Horiz Expansion 


X1 




Vert Expansion 


X1 




VertExp Options 


Default (top) 




Print Modifiers 







FIGURE 4-3 SAMPLE FORMAT PAGE PRINTOUT 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-14 



GEK-99044 



Sample Character Set 



Selecting this option will print an example of the currently selected 
character set/country character table. Press the Clear pushbutton to 
stop printing. See Figure 4-4. 



CouTitr-y 






USA 


igo 






















CM^Qcbcr Sot 


USA 


: T 


437 




















■:■ 


1 


2 


a 


-i 


5 


■■:. 


: 


a 


* 


A 1 


3 C 


:■ 


f 


= 


if o 


*■ 




^ 


y 


1= 


* 


p 


■; 


£ 


o 


! L 


u 


* 


— 


i a 


* 


! 


L 


r. 





- 


■1 


u 


■ 


i | 


_ 


. 


|H 


± 


3 9 


: 


■■ 


1 


B 


R 


t- 


r 


r 


* 


Cr 






r 


£ 


3 * 


ii 


rt 


* 


C 


5 


c 


- 


-. 


n 


u 


I 


L 


ii 


i 


4 * 


f 


t 


4 


D 


1 


d 


-_ 


~ 


r j 


Ft 


n 


£ 


f 


O t 


i 


■■- 


'o 


e 


Li 


■- 


u 


I 


i 


M 


f 




- 


J 


# 


- 


£. 


■■- 


- 


■-' 


f 


V 


t 


u 


e 


i F 




i- 1 


3 


7 * 


3 


■ 


■' 


■5 


J 


3 


V- 


■- 







F 


- 


T 


: 


s ta 


■ 


■; 


* 


H 


X 


h 


•: 


& 


9 


1 n 


, 


1 


■ 


? * 


+■ 


:• 


9 


I 


v 


i 


V 


- 


u 


- i 


i i 


■ 


& 


- 


rt e 


-J 


r 


: 


J 


1 


J 


£ 


* 


u 


- 


I 


fi 


» 


& j 


f- 


*■ 


i 


K 


r 


i. 


i 


1 


i 


8 I 


s 


u 


J 


C fr 


■"- 


* 


< 


L 


V 


! 


7 


i 


i 


! 1 


.. 


1 


□ f 


■- 


- 


■■ 


n 


i 


V" 


1 


'. 


¥ 


i i 


r 


■.:= 


:■ 


E 12 


jh 


. 


H 


m 


A 


■ l 


- 


,■■ 


jj 


* j 


. 


\ 


k 


- 


F # 


T 


/ 


7 


<" 


- 


o 


■J 


i 


f 


r - i 


j 


=i 





FIGURE 4-4 SAMPLE CHARACTER SET 



Sample Font Page 



Selecting this option prints the current font package included in the 
printer software. The Font Page printout is meant to compliment the 
Status Page printout. This report is for reference purposes only, it 
reflects the fonts included in the Font part number, which is 
identified under Software IDs on the Status Page printout. It does not 
reflect selections or settings, either default or customer-defined. Press 
the Clear pushbutton to stop printing. The following is an example of 
the font page printout. 



GEK-99044 



4-15 



Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



Font Page 


5000 






Font Package: 


44A1 00082 






Font List 


Alignment 


ALN:10 


33 




Courier NLQ 


CON:10 


1000 






CON:13 


1000 




Correspond 


CRE:10 


1000 






CRE:13 


1000 




Data Proces 


GCD:10 


1000 






GCD:13 


1000 






GCD:16 


1000 




Gothic NLQ 


GCN:10 


1000 






GCN:13 


1000 






GCN:16 


1000 




High Speed 2 


HSD:10 


1000 




High Speed 


THD:10 


1000 






HSD:16 


1000 




Italic NLQ 


ITN:10 


1000 




Graphics 


LGD:10 


1000 






LGD:13 


1000 






LGD:16 


1000 




OCR-A 


OAN:10 


1000 




OCR-B 


OBN:10 


1000 




CanadianPst 


ORN:16 


1000 



Number of Maps: 130 



Maps (Overlay): 
USA ISO 
Dutch 
Dan/Nor B 
Swed/Fin C 
Turkish 
FX: France 
FX: Italy 
FX: Spain II 
FX: Portugal 
FX: Slo/Croat 



Germany 

Italian 

Dan/Nor C 

Swed/Fin D 

Greek 

FX: Germany 

FX: Spain I 

FX: Latin Amer 

FX: Africa 

Legal 



French A ISO 
UK ISO 
Dan/Nor D 
Swiss 
Italian ISO 
FX: UK 
FX: Japan 
FX: Netherland 
FX: Switzerland 
Korea 



French B ISO 
Spanish 
Swed/Fin A 
Slo/Croat 
Spanish ISO 
FX: Denmark I 
FX: Norway 
FX: Angl-Unvrs 
FX: Turkey 
None 



Canadian 
Dan/Nor A 
Swed/Fin B 
UKA 
FX: USA 
FX: Denmark II 
FX: Denmark II 
FX: Span Amer 
FX: Greece 
Download Map 



Maps (Code Page): 

CCP050 

Code Page 855 

Code Page 865 

Roman 8 

ISO-8859-1 

ISO-8859-6 

Dec Supp 

Dec Finnish 

Dec J IS Roman 

Dec Dutch 

Dec Hebrew Supp 

ISO Latin 5 

ISO Lat/Cy Supp 

BRASCII 

Code MJK (CSFR) 

KU 42(KU Thai) 

TIS 18 (General) 



USA CP 437 
Code Page 858 
Code Page 866 
Mazowia CP 
ISO-8859-2 
ISO-8859-7 
Dec Tech 
Dec French 
Dec Nor/Dan 
Dec Swiss 
Dec ISO Lat/Heb 
Greek Supp 
PC437 Greek 
ABICOMP 
Estonia 

TIS11(TS988) 
None 



Multi CP 850 
Code Page 860 
Code Page 867 
Turkish CP 
ISO-8859-3 
ISO-8859-8 
Dec Sped Graph 
Dec FrCanadian 
Dec Spanish 
Dec Portuguese 
Dec Katakana 
Turkish 7-Bit 
PC861 Icelandic 
PC857 (Turkish) 
PC774 Lithuania 
TIS13(IBMStd) 



Code Page 852 
Code Page 863 
Greek CP 437 
Greek CP 851 
ISO-8859-4 
ISO-8859-9 
Dec ISO-Latin 1 
Dec German 
Dec Swedish 
Dec Legal 
Dec ANSI 
Turkish 8-Bit 
PC869 Greek 
ISO Latin 1T 
PC866 LAT 
TIS 16 (SIC Old) 



Code Page 853 
Code Page 864 
Dec MultiNtnl 
Kamen 
ISO-8859-5 
ISO-8859-1 5 
Dec British 
Dec ISO Italian 
Dec ISO Nor/Dan 
Dec Hebrew 
ISO Latin 2 
ISO/Lat/Gr Supp 
USSR (GOST) 
Bulgaria 

ECMA-94-1 Mult 
TIS17(SICSTD) 



FIGURE 4-5 SAMPLE FONT PRINT PRINTOUT 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-16 



GEK-99044 



ADJUST TOF 



Operator 



Adjust TOF 



This menu option allows the operator to print a test pattern, view a 
test pattern and adjust the top of form. This menu is used to check, 
and then align the paper to the print line of the printer. It is used to 
fine-tune the top of form setting. Use the | arrow and/ or j, arrow 
pushbuttons to align the paper. 

There are three steps to using this feature: 

1 . Place the paper perforation at the alignment point in the upper 
tractor doors. (See Figure 3-1) 

2. Perform Print at TOF options until the printing is set to the first 
printing line of the printer. (See "Print at TOF" for additional 
information.) 

3. Perform Rolling ASCII to verify TOF settings are correct. (See 
"Rolling ASCII" for additional information.) 

Use the following procedures to perform these actions: 

1. While in Operator menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Adjust TOF is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Adjust TOF options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to select an Adjust TOF option. The 
following describes each selection available. 



Print At TOF 



Adjust TOF 

Print at TOF 



Use this menu to check the positioning of printing on the paper. The 
printer will print a pattern HHHHH at the current top of form 
position. Use the f or j. pushbutton to adjust the printing location on 
the paper. 

Use the following procedures to view the pattern: 

1. While in Adjust TOF menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton, until Print at TOF is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton. The printer will print HHHHH at the 
left side of the paper and feed the paper forward. Adjust the 
placement of the HHHHH on the paper by using the f arrow or j. 
arrow. Repeat this step as necessary. Each time this step is 
repeated, the printer will print HHHHH the right of the last 
printout. After the fifth attempt to make adjustments, the printer 
will advance the paper to the next form. Continue making 
adjustments as necessary. See Figure 4-6. 



GEK-99044 



4-17 



Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu 



3. Proceed to Set TOF to set a new top of form. 



FIRST 
VIEW 



HHHHH |_|Lii_jLiL_L HHHHH 

' 4- 



AFTER 
ADJUSTMENT 



AFTER 
ADJUSTMENT 



FIGURE 4-6 PRINT AT TOF SAMPLE (THREE REPETITIONS) 



Set TOF 



Adjust TOF 



Set TOF 



After using the Print at TOF to adjust the printing to the top of form, 
this option allows the operator to set the top of form. 

Use the following procedures to set the top of form using this menu 
option: 

1. While in the Adjust TOF menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Set TOF is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton. The printer will retract the paper, so 
the paper is correctly positioned at the print wires for printing. (If 
necessary, see "Setting Top of Form" for more information.) Use 
Print Pattern to verify printing begins at first line of form. 

Note 

To ensure proper printing integrity, do not print within 1/8 inch 

of perforations. 



Rolling ASCII 



Adjust TOF 

Rolling ASCII 



Selecting this option will print a test pattern until the operator 
presses the Clear pushbutton to stop. This option can be used to 
verify printing occurs at the top of form. See "Test Pattern Printing" in 
Chapter 2 for additional information. 



DISCARD JOB 



Adjust TOF 

Discard Job 



This menu option is used to clear the printer's buffer. 

Use the following procedures to select the discard job option: 

1. While in the Adjust TOF menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Discard Job is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to discard job (clear the buffer) in 
printer. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



4-18 



GEK-99044 



CHAPTER 5. USING THE SET UP MENU 

The Set Up menu allows the operator to modify or create stored 
formats. The Set Up menu also allows the operator to set default 
settings for Horiz Tab, Vertical Format, Interface Settings, Engine 
Options, Print Control, GenPtrOpts (General Printer Options), 
TearOff, Emulation, Display Lang (Display Language) and Filter. See 
Appendix I for the complete Set Up Menu Map. 



Main Menu 



SetUp 



While in Local, press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton until 
Set Up menu is displayed in the bottom right corner of the LCD. Main 
Menu will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

To move up or down a level of menu options, press the ▲ (up) or ▼ 
(down) menu browse pushbuttons. To move laterally among options 
on the same level, use the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbuttons. 

Currently selected menu options are displayed in the LCD with a < 
symbol, which follows immediately to the right of the menu option. 
Some menu options are toggle options and reflect an enabled or 
disabled condition. Press the Select pushbutton to cause the printer 
to perform this operation. 

Press the Clear pushbutton to return to the upper level menu or to 
Local when in a first-level menu. 



FORMAT 



Local 



Menu 



Select Format 

Default< 



This menu option allows the operator to change or create and store 
format settings for the printer. (See Set Up menu map in Appendix I 
for available selections. 

There are three steps to changing or creating a stored format. 

1. Select the format Xo modify or create. 

2. Modify the format (See "Modify Format" for procedures and 
menu options.) 

3. Save the format (See "Save Format" for procedures and menu 
options.) 

Use the following procedures to select a format to modify: 

1. Press the On Line pushbutton to place the printer in Local Menu 
mode. 

2. From the control panel, press the Format pushbutton until the 
desired format is displayed in the LCD window. If no previously 
saved format exists, DEFAULT< will be displayed in the LCD 
window. 

3. Use the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
desired format is in the lower right corner of the LCD. 



GEK-99044 



5-1 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Modify Format 



Format 



Modify Format 



This menu option allows the operator to modify a format. 
Use the following procedure to modify a format: 

1. While in Format menu, press M (left) or ► (right) until Modify 
Format is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Modify Format options. 

The following describes each of the selections available. 



Modify Format 

Format Name 



Modify Format 



Default 



Format Name 

This menu option allows the operator to change the selected format 
name. The LCD will display the format selected from the control 
panel using the Format pushbutton. If no previously saved format 
name exists, the format will be displayed as Default. 

Note 

Use unique format names when creating or modifying a format. 

Use the following procedures to select Format Name options: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Format Name is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to select a Format Name option. 
Notice the cursor (underline) beneath the currently selected digit 
to be changed. 

3. In Format Name mode, the display switches to a format where the 
operator may enter any alphanumeric character. The four menu 
browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The horizontal 
< ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor (underline) to 
the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or down) 
pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by one. 
Alphanumeric characters will display in place of the underlined 
digit sequentially. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Modify Format 

Font Style 



Font Style 

This menu option is used to select the font style. (See Set Up Menu 
Map in Appendix I for available selections.) 

Use the following procedures to select font style options: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Font Style is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-2 



GEK-99044 



2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Font 
Style options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to select a Font Style option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the saved Font Style option. 

CharSet / Country 

The character map consists of 256 characters (0X00 - 00XFF). Using 
the Character Set (0X80-OXFF) and Country (00-7F) options allows 
the operator to select the upper and lower ends of the character maps 
respectively. Under the Char Set/ Country, there are two sub-menus, 
Character Set and Country. (See Operator Menu Map in Appendix I 
for selections available.) 



Character Set 



Modify Format 

CharSet/Country 



CharSet/Country 

Character Set 



Character Set 

USA CP 437< 



This menu allows selection of the characters 0X80 to 0XFF of the 
character map. 

When using the Proprinter emulation, international character sets 
must be selected using escape sequences from the host. See 
Programmer's Manual for more information on international character 
sets and character charts. 

Use the following procedures to select a character set: 

1. While in Modify Format Menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until CharSet/Country is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
character set sub-menu. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Character Set is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
character set options. Character Set will be displayed in the upper 
left corner of the LCD. 

5. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
character set desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

6. Press the Select pushbutton to select a character set. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the currently selected 
character set. 



Country 



Modify Format 

CharSet/Country 



This menu allows selection of the characters 0X00 to 0X7F of the 
character map. 

Use the following procedures to select a country: 

1. While in Modify Format Menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until CharSet/Country is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 



GEK-99044 



5-3 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



CharSet/Country 

Country 



Country 



USA ISO< 



2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
country sub-menu. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Country is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
country options. Country will be displayed in the upper left corner 
of the LCD. 

5. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons until the 
country desired is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

6. Press the Select pushbutton to select a country. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the currently selected country. 



Modify Format 

Select CPI 



Select CPI 



Modify Format 



Select LPI 



10< 



LPI 



6< 



CPI 

This menu option is used to select the characters per inch (CPI.) (See 
Set Up Menu Map for available selections.) 

Use the following procedures to select the CPI options: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Select CPI is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the CPI 
options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired CPI setting is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a CPI option. The < symbol 
will now immediately follow the saved Select CPI option. (See 
"Select CPI (User Set)" under Using the Operator Menu for 
procedures to set up a non-standard CPI.) 

LPI 

This menu is used to select the lines per inch (LPI) (See Set Up 
Menu Map for available selections.) 

Use the following procedures to select the LPI options: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until LPI is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the LPI 
options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton, until the 
desired LPI setting is displayed in the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a LPI option. The < symbol 
will now immediately follow the saved LPI option. (See "Select LPI 
(User Set)" under Using the Operator Menu for procedures to set 
up a non-standard LPI.) 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-4 



GEK-99044 



Form Length 



Modify Format 

Form Length 



Form Length 



By IN 



Form Length IN 



03.0 



Form Length IN 



03.0 



This menu option is used to setup the form length. The form length 
may be set By Lines, By MM, or By Inches. 

Use the following procedures for setting the form length: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Form Length is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Form 
Length options. Form Length will be displayed in upper left corner 
of LCD. 

3. Press < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton and select By 
Lines, By MM, or By IN. Press the Select pushbutton to select one 
of these options. The current setting is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the setting. Notice 
the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal < ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Modify Format 

Top Margin 



Top Margin 



By IN 



Top Margin IN 



00.0 



Top Margin IN 



00.0 



Top Margin 

This menu option is used to setup the top margin. The top margin 
may be set using By Inches, By MM or By Lines. 

Use the following procedures for setting the top margin: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Top Margin is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Top 
Margin options. Top Margin will be displayed in upper left corner 
of LCD. 

3. Press < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton and select By 
IN, By MM, or By Lines. Press the Select pushbutton to select one 
of these options. The current setting is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the setting. Notice 
the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal A ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 



GEK-99044 



5-5 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Modify Format 

Bottom Margin 



Bottom Margin 



By IN 



Bottom Mar IN 



00.0 



Bottom Mar IN 



00.0 



down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 

Bottom Margin 

This menu option is used to setup the bottom margin. The bottom 
margin may be set using By Inches, By MM or By Lines. 

Use the following procedures for setting the bottom margin: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Bottom Margin is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Bottom Margin options. Bottom Margin will be displayed in upper 
left corner of LCD. 

3. Press < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton and select By 
IN, By MM, or By Lines. Press the Select pushbutton to select one 
of these options. The current setting is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the setting. Notice 
the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal < ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Modify Format 

Left Margin 



Left Margin 



By IN 



Left Margin 

This menu option is used to setup the left margin. The left margin 
may be set using By Inches, By MM or By Column. 

Use the following procedures for setting the left margin: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Left Margin is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Left 
Margin options. Left Margin will be displayed in upper left corner 
of LCD. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-6 



GEK-99044 



Left Margin IN 



00.0 



Bottom Mar IN 



00.0 



3. Press < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton and select By 
IN, By MM, or By Column. Press the Select pushbutton to select 
one of these options. The current setting is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the setting. Notice 
the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal A ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

5. Press the Select pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Modify Format 

Right Margin 



Right Margin 



By IN 



Right Margin IN 



00.0 



Right Margin 

This menu option is used to setup the right margin. The right 
margin may be set using By Inches, By MM or By Column. 

Use the following procedures for setting the right margin: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Right Margin is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Right 
Margin options. Right Margin will be displayed in upper left corner 
of LCD. 

3. Press < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton and select By 
IN, By MM, or By Column. Press the Select pushbutton to select 
one of these options. The current setting is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 



GEK-99044 



5-7 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Right Margin IN 



00.0 



4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the setting. Notice 
the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal < ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Modify Format 
Top Print Ref 



Top Print Ref 



By IN 



Top Print Ref IN 



00.0 



Top Print Ref IN 



00.0 



Top Print Ref 

This menu option is used to setup the top print ref. The top print ref 
may be set using By Inches, By MM or By Lines. 

Use the following procedures for setting the top print ref: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Top Print Ref is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Top 
Print Ref options. Top Print Ref will be displayed in upper left 
corner of LCD. 

3. Press A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton and select By 
IN, By MM, or By Lines. Press the Select pushbutton to select one 
of these options. The current setting is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the setting. Notice 
the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal < ► (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) under the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-8 



GEK-99044 



Left Print Ref 



Modify Format 

Left Print Ref 



Left Print Ref 



By IN 



Left Print Ref IN 



00.0 



Left Print Ref IN 



00.0 



This menu option is used to setup the left print ref. The left print ref 
may be set using By Inches, By MM or BY Column. 

Use the following procedures for setting the left print ref: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Left Print Ref is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the □ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Left 
Print Ref options. Left Print Ref will be displayed in upper left 
corner of LCD. 

3. Press □ (left) or □ (right) menu browse pushbutton and select By 
IN, By MM, or By Column. Press the Select pushbutton to select 
one of these options. The current setting is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the setting. Notice 
the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. The four 
menu browse pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The 
horizontal □ □ (left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) to the digit to be changed; the vertical □ □ (up or 
down) pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Modify Format 

Horiz Expansion 



Horiz Expansion 



X1< 



Horiz Expansion 

This menu is used to expand the currently selected font style 
horizontally from 1 to 8 times normal width. (This is not the same 
as expanded character printing with the oversize character font.) 
See examples of options below. 



XI 



XI 
X2 
X3 
X4 
X5 

X6 

XT "- 

X8 
Use the following procedure to change the horizontal expansion: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Horiz Expansion is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the □ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Horiz 
Expansion options. Horiz Expansion will now be displayed in the 
upper left corner of the LCD. 



GEK-99044 



5-9 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



3. Press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a horizontal expansion 
option. The < symbol will now immediately follow the saved 
horizontal expansion option. 

Vert Expansion 

This menu is used to expand the currently selected font style 
vertically from 1 to 8 times normal height. (This is not the same as 
expanded character printing with the oversize character font.) See 
examples of options below. 



XI 
X2 
X3 
X4 
X5 
X6 
X7 
X8 



>U 



Modify Format 

Vert Expansion 



Vert Expansion 



X1< 



- d u g | p | 

! Jl 



1 



Use the following procedure to change the vertical expansion: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Vert Expansion is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the □ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Vert 
Expansion options. Vert Expansion will now be displayed in the 
upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a vertical expansion option. 
The < symbol will now immediately follow the saved horizontal 
expansion option. 



VertExp Options 

This menu is used to control how the expanded characters will 
appear. (See Set Up Menu Map in Appendix I for available 
selections.) Although all expanded characters are printed from the 
top down, the positioning on the page will make them appear to 
"group" up or "sag" down when compared to normally printed 
characters on the same line. See examples below. 



Baseline Option /\A 



AAA 



"GROUP" UP 



Default Option /\ 



a aaa 



"SAG" DOWN 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-10 



GEK-99044 



Modify Format 

VertExp Options 



VertExp Options 

Default (top)< 



1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until VertExp Options is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
VertExp Options options. VertExp Options will now be displayed in 
the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a VertExp Options option. 
The < symbol will now immediately follow the saved VertExp 
Options option. 



Modify Format 

Print Modifiers 



Print Modifiers 

Emphasized 



Print Modifiers 

This menu is used to select font enhancements. See Set Up Menu 
Map in Appendix I for available selections. 

Use the following procedure to select a print modifier: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Print Modifiers is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Print 
Modifiers options. Print Modifiers will now be displayed in the 
upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a Print Modifier option. The 
< symbol will now immediately follow the saved Print Modifier 
option. 



Modify Format 
Print Options 



Print Options 

High Speed< 



Print Options 

This menu is also used to select font enhancements. See Set Up 
Menu Map In Appendix I for available selections. 

Use the following procedures to select a Print Options: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Print Options is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Print 
Options options. Print Options will now be displayed in the upper 
left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a Print Options option. The 
< symbol will now immediately follow the saved Print Options 
option. 



GEK-99044 



5-11 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Slew Rate 



Modify Format 

Slew Rate 



Slew Rate 



Normal< 



This menu is used to set the speed at which paper can be moved 
through the printer during the printing operations (form feeds, 
vertical moves, etc.) The reduced slew speed can be useful if the 
printer is experiencing trouble with heavy stock or stiff multi-part 
forms. Using the reduced slew speed can slow throughput 
considerably. 

Use the following procedures to select a Slew Rate: 

1. While in Modify Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbuttons until Slew Rate is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Slew 
Rate options. Slew Rate will now be displayed in the upper left 
corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a Slew Rate option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the saved Slew Rate option. 



Save Format 



Format 



Save Format 



Save Format 



Default 



This is the final step used to modify or create a stored format. (See 
"Format" for additional information.) This menu is used to save the 
format settings created after selecting and modifying a format. 
When saving a format, the operator is given the choice to save the 
format to the active (the format chosen from the control panel) or as 
a blank format, if available. There are ten possible customer-defined 
format slots available. It is recommended that each customer- 
defined format be saved with a unique name. 

Note 

Print a Format Page printout and save for future reference or in 
the event a format(s) needs to be re-configured. 

Use the following procedure to save a format: 

1. While in Stored Formats menu, press the < (left) to ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Save Format appears in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Save Format will 
appear in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired format is listed. If no previously saved format name 
exists, the default format names are Default through Blank Format 
1 ...9. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a format slot. Choosing a 
blank format will immediately display the format name modified 
under Format Name. 

5. Press the Select pushbutton to confirm this format name. Press 
the Clear pushbutton to exit this option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-12 



GEK-99044 



HORIZ TAB 



SetUp 



Horiz Tab 



Horiz Tab 



By Column 



Hor Tabs Cols 



01:New 



Hor Tabs Cols 



01:000 



This menu is used to set or clear horizontal tabs. The Horiz Tab 
may be set using By Inches, By MM, By Column, or Clear All Tabs. 

Use the following procedures for setting a horizontal tab: 

1. While in Set Up menu, press < (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbutton until Horiz Tab is displayed in the lower right corner 
of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) pushbutton to access the horizontal tab 
submenus. Horiz Tab is displayed in the upper left corner of the 
LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons and 
select Clear All Tabs, By Columns, By Inches, or By MM. Press the 
Select pushbutton to select one of these options. Hor Tabs Cols, 
Hor Tabs IN, or Hor Tabs MM will be displayed in the upper left 
corner of LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the horizontal tab 
setting. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first 
digit and the default number is 000. The four menu browse 
pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The horizontal < ► 
(left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor (underline) under 
the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu 
browse pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

Note 

The first two digits represent the tab ID and the last three digits 

are the tab location. The number of tab IDs available is 

dependent on the emulation selected. See "Horizontal/Vertical 

Tab Id Maximum Slots" table in Appendix H. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



VERTICAL FORMAT 



SetUp 



Vertical Format 



Type Select 

Vertical Tabs< 



This menu is used to select either an emulation-dependent vertical 
format unit (VFU) or a vertical tab table for vertical moves. 

Use the following procedures to select a vertical format: 

1. While in Set Up menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbutton until Vertical Format is displayed in the upper left 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
vertical format submenu. Type Select is displayed in the upper 
left corner of the LCD. 



GEK-99044 



5-13 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Vertical Tabs 



Type Select 

Vertical Tabs< 



Vertical Tabs 



By Lines 



Vert Tab Lines 



01:000 



3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons to select 
the desired vertical format type. 

The following describes the selections available. 



This menu is used to clear or set the vertical tab. The vertical tab 
length may be set By Lines, By Inches, By MM or Clear All Tabs. 

Use the following procedures for setting a vertical tab: 

1. While in Type Select menu, press the T (down) menu browse 
pushbutton. Vert Tab will be displayed in the upper left corner of 
the LCD. (This step assumes Vertical Tabs is the currently 
selected setting. If not, press the Select pushbutton to select 
Vertical Tabs.) 

2. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbuttons and 
select Clear All Tabs, By Lines, By Inches, or By MM. Press the 
Select pushbutton to select one of these options. Vert Tab Lines, 
Vert Tab IN, or Vert Tab MM will be displayed in the upper left 
corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton again to modify the vertical tab 
setting. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first 
digit and the default number is 000. The four menu browse 
pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The horizontal < ► 
(left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor (underline) under 
the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu 
browse pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

Note 

The first two digits represent the tab ID and the last three digits 

are the tab location. The number of tab IDs available is 

dependent on the emulation selected. See "Horizontal/Vertical 

Tab Id Maximum Slots" table in Appendix H. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 



Note 
Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Emulation VFU 



Type Select 

Emulation VFU 



This option sets the Vertical Format for an emulation-dependent 
vertical format unit (VFU.) The VFU option is for all emulations 
except Proprinter and FX286e. See the Programmer's Manual for 
additional information. 

Use the following procedure to select the Emulation VFU option: 

1 While in Type Select menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Emulation VFU is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. Press Select to select Emulation VFU. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-14 



GEK-99044 



INTERFACE SETTINGS 



SetUp 

Interface Settgs 



Interface Settgs 

Multi Source 



This menu and its sub-menus are used to setup the printer's 
interface options and the serial interface parameters. See the Set Up 
Menu Map in Appendix I for available selections. 

Use the following procedures to select an interface setting: 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until InterfaceSettgs is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the sub- 
menu options. Interface Settgs will be displayed in the upper left 
corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired interface is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to 
select MultiSource, Parallel Setup, Serial Setup, Expansion 1, or 
Expansion 2. 

The following describes the selections available. 



MultiSource 



Interface Settgs 

MultiSource 



This sub-menu is used to select the multiple interface option. The 
printer will automatically choose the interface receiving data. 

Use the following procedure to select the MultiSource option: 

1. While in the InterfaceSettgs menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until MultiSource is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to select MultiSource. Delay Seconds 

will be displayed in the upper left corner of the display and the 
current setting will be displayed in the lower right corner of the 
display. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the 
first digit and the default number is 000. The four menu browse 
pushbuttons revert to data entry operation. The horizontal < ► 
(left or right) pushbuttons position the cursor (underline) under 
the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu 
browse pushbuttons increment/ decrement the selected digit by 
one. 

3. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. The valid range of values for this option is 006 to 030. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



GEK-99044 



5-15 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Parallel Setup 



Interface Settgs 

Parallel Setup 



Parallel Setup 

No Fault PO & OFF 



This menu option is used to configure the parallel interface only. 
There is only one setting, No Fault PO & Off, under this menu to 
enable or disable. In the default condition (disabled), the parallel fault 
lead will be set to true for either of the two conditions, paper out or if 
in the offline condition. If enabled, the parallel fault lead will not be 
set to true for either (or both) of the conditions, paper out and/or 
offline. 

Use the following procedures to configure the Parallel Setup option: 

1. While in the InterfaceSettgs menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Parallel Setup is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to select Parallel 
Setup. Parallel Setup will be displayed in the upper left corner of 
the display and the current setting will be displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable a setting. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled setting. 



Serial 



This menu option is used to configure the serial interface. See the Set 
Up Menu Map in Appendix I for a complete view of selections and/ or 
submenus available. 

Use the following procedure to select the Serial option: 

■ While in the InterfaceSettgs menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Serial is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

The following describes the selections available. 



Interface Settgs 
Serial Type 



Serial Type 



RS232C < 



Serial Type 

This menu is used to select the serial interface type, RS232C or 
RS422. 

Note 

The Serial Type selected determines which menu items appear 
under the Serial Setup menu. 

Use the following procedure to select the serial interface type: 

1. While in the Interface Settgs menu, press the T (down) menu 
browse pushbutton. Serial Type is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Serial 
Type options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired setting is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
display. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-16 



GEK-99044 



Interface Settgs 



Serial 



Interface Settgs 
Serial Setup 



4. Press the Select pushbutton to enable a setting or disable a 
setting. The < symbol will now immediately follow the selected 
(saved) setting. 

Serial Setup 

This menu, its sub-menus, and options are used to change 
parameter settings for the serial interface. See the Set Up Menu Map 
in Appendix I for a complete listing of available selections. 

Note 

The Serial Type selected determines which menu items appear 
under the Serial Setup menu. 

Use the following procedures to select the serial setup option: 

1. While in the Interface Settgs menu, press the T (down) menu 
browse pushbutton. Serial Setup will be displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Serial 
Setup options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Serial Setup is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 
Press the T (down) menu browse or Select pushbutton to access 
the Serial Setup sub-menus. 

The following describes the selections available. 



Protocol 



Serial Setup 



Protocol 



Protocol 



XON/XOFF 



This sub-menu is used to select a protocol setting for the serial setup 
for both RS232 and RS422 serial type. Protocol settings configure the 
communication settings of the printer. See Set Up Menu Map in 
Appendix I for a complete listing of available selections. 

Use the following procedures to select a protocol submenu: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the T (down) menu browse 
pushbutton until Protocol is displayed in the lower right corner of 
the display menu. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Protocol will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired protocol sub-menu selection is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

The following describes the selections available. 



XON/XOFF 



This option is used to configure the XON/XOFF (also known as 
DC1/DC3) settings for both RS232 and RS422 serial type. Use the 
following procedures to enable/ disable or change an XON/XOFF 
setting: 



GEK-99044 



5-17 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Protocol 



XON/XOFF 



XON/XOFF 

Ready/Busy 



CD(DTR) 



Protocol 



CD(DTR) 



CD(DTR) 



Ready/Busy 



1. While in the Protocol menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until the XON/XOFF option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
XON/XOFF options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable a setting. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the selected (saved) setting. 



Option 


Meaning 


Ready/ Busy 


XOFF is transmitted to the host by the printer when 
the print is unable to receive more data. XON is 
transmitted to the host by the printer when the 
printer is ready to receive more data. 


ON/OFFline 


XOFF is transmitted by the printer when it goes offline 
and XON is transmitted by the printer when it goes 
online. 


Fault 


XOFF is transmitted by the printer when a fault is 
detected. XON is transmitted by the printer when the 
fault has been cleared. 


Robust XOFF 


XOFF no extra XON codes are sent. 


Robust XON 


XON codes are sent to the host every 20 seconds if the 
printer is ready to receive data. 



This option is used to configure CD(DTR) settings for RS232 serial 
type. This is also known as Data Terminal Ready Use the following 
procedures to enable/disable or change an CD (DTR) setting: 

1. While in the Protocol menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until the CD(DTR) option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
CD (DTR) options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled setting. 



Option 


Meaning 


Ready/ Busy 


DTR signal should be used to reflect if the printer is 
ready (able to receive data) or busy (currently unable 
to receive data.) 


ON/OFFline 


DTR signal should be used to reflect the printer is 
online or offline. 


Fault 


DTR signal should be used to reflect whether a fault 
condition exists. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-18 



GEK-99044 



CA(RTS) 



Protocol 



CA(RTS) 



CA(RTS) 



Ready/Busy 



This option is used to configure CA(RTS) settings for RS232 serial 
type. This is also known as Request to Send. Use the following 
procedures to enable/ disable or change an CA (RTS) setting: 

1. While in the Protocol menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until the CA(RTS) option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
CA(RTS) options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



SCA(SRTS) 



Protocol 



SCA(SRTS) 



SCA(SRTS) 
Ready/Busy 



Option 


Meaning 


Ready/ Busy 


RTS signal should be used to reflect if the printer is 
ready (able to receive data) or busy (currently unable 
to receive data.) 


ON/OFFline 


RTS signal should be used to reflect the printer is 
online or offline. 


Fault 


RTS signal should be used to reflect whether a fault 
condition exists. 



This option is used to configure the SCA(SRTS) settings RS232 serial 
type. This is also known as Secondary Request to Send. Use the 
following procedures to enable/ disable or change an SCA(SRTS) 
setting: 

1. While in the Protocol menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until the SCA(SRTS) option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
SCA(SRTS) options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



Option 


Meaning 


Ready/ Busy 


STRS signal should be used to reflect if the printer is 
ready (able to receive data) or busy (currently unable 
to receive data.) 


ON/OFFline 


SRTS signal should be used to reflect the printer is 
online or offline. 


Fault 


SRTS signal should be used to reflect whether a fault 
condition exists. 



GEK-99044 



5-19 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



ETX/ACK 



Protocol 



ETX/ACK 



ETX/ACK 



Disable 



This option is used to configure the ETX/ACK (End of 
Text/ Acknowledge) settings for RS232 serial type. ETX/ACK is a 
serial validity check protocol, where the host appends the ETX (end of 
text) code (0X03) at the end of each data block and waits to receive 
an acknowledge character (ACK=0X06) from the printer within a time 
period prior to sending the next block of data. This is not an 
ETX/ACK/ NAK protocol. The printer never responds with a NAK 
(0X15) even if errors are detected. If enabled, the printer controller 
immediately replies to an ETX with an ACK. If disabled, the ETX is 
ignored and no further action is taken (treats it as just another data 
character.) If On Prn Complete is selected, the printer waits until the 
data block has been printed prior to sending the host the ACK 
character. Use the following procedures to enable/ disable or change 
an ETX/ACK setting: 

1. While in the Protocol menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until the ETX/ACK option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
ETX/ACK options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable a setting. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



Inhibit Xmit 



Serial Setup 

Inhibit Xmit 



Inhibit Xmit 



Never 



This sub-menu is used to configure an inhibit Xmit setting for the 
serial setup for RS232 serial type. The options available under this 
sub-menu are Never or Via CB(CTS). If Never is selected, the host is 
prevented from controlling the printer's ability to transmit back to the 
host via the CB (CTS) hardware lead. If Via CB(CTS) is selected, the 
host can control the inhibit transmit with the Clear to Send (CB) lead. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable an inhibit Xmit 
setting: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Inhibit Xmit is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display menu. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Inhibit 
Xmit options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired protocol sub-menu option is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-20 



GEK-99044 



Lead Polarity 



This sub-menu is used to configure a lead polarity setting for the 
serial setup for RS232 serial type. There are five additional sub- 
menus available. 



Serial Setup 

Lead Polarity 



Type of Signal 
Sent 


Meaning 


High 


Low 


CD(DTR) 


Signal will be generated 
when the printer is ready 
and the internal buffer is 
not full 


Signal will be generated 
when the printer is not 
ready or the internal 
serial buffer is full 


CA (RTS) 


SCA (STRS) 


CB (CTS) 


CC (DSR) 



Use the following procedures to access the lead polarity submenu: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Lead Polarity is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display menu. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Lead 
Polarity sub-menus. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired lead polarity sub-menu selection is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

The following describes the selections available. 



CD(DTR) 



Lead Polarity 

CD(DTR) 



There are two settings for the CD(DTR), high or low. See table under 
Lead Polarity for additional information. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable or change a CD (DTR) 
setting for RS232serial type: 

1. While in the Lead Polarity menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until the CD(DTR) option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
CD(DTR) options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



CA(RTS) 



Lead Polarity 



CA(RTS) 



There are two settings for the CA(RTS), high or low. See table under 
Lead Polarity for additional information. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable or change a CA (RTS) 
setting for RS232 serial type: 

1. While in the Lead Polarity menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until the CA(RTS) option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
CA(RTS) options. 



GEK-99044 



5-21 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



SCA(SRTS) 



Lead Polarity 

SCA (SRTS) 



There are two settings for the SCA(SRTS), high or low. See table 
under Lead Polarity for additional information. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable or change a 
SCA(SRTS) setting for RS232 serial type: 

1. While in the Lead Polarity menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until the SCA(SRTS) option is 
displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
SCA(SRTS) options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



CB(CTS) 



Lead Polarity 



CB(CTS) 



There are two settings for the CB(CTS), high or low. See table under 
Lead Polarity for additional information. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable or change a CB (CTS) 
setting for RS232 serial type: 

1. While in the Lead Polarity menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until the CB(CTS) option is displayed. 

2. Press the ▼ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
CB(CTS) options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



CC(DSR) 



Lead Polarity 

CC(DSR) 



There are two settings for the CC(DSR), high or low. See table under 
Lead Polarity for additional information. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable or change a CC(DSR) 
setting for RS232 serial type: 

1. While in the Lead Polarity menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until the CC(DSR) option is displayed. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
CC(DSR) options. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. See 
the Set Up Menu Map for available selections. The < symbol will 
now immediately follow the enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-22 



GEK-99044 



Data Bits 



Serial Setup 



Data Bits 



Data Bits 



7 Bits 



This sub-menu is used to configure the number of data bits per 
character setting for the serial setup for RS232 and RS422 serial 
type. There are two settings under the Data Bits option, 7 Bits or 8 
Bits. Set the data bits equal to that of the host computer. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a data bits setting: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Data Bits is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display menu. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Data Bits will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 
Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



Parity 



Serial Setup 



Parity 



This sub-menu is used to configure a parity setting for the serial 
setup. Parity is a serial port communication parameter used to 
identify a data bit position in each serial data character for error 
detection. 



Option 


Meaning if Enabled 


No Parity Bit 


The serial character does not have this bit and 
parity checking is disabled. 


Ignore 


The character does contain the parity bit, but it is 
ignored by the printer with no error detection being 
made. The bit may e a logical one or zero. 


Even 


The parity bit set by the host is such that there is 
an even number of logical "ones" in the character. 
The printer checks for an even number of "ones" 
and flags a parity error if there is an odd number of 
"ones" constituting the data bits including the 
parity bit. 


Odd 


The parity bit is set by the host such that there is 
an odd number of logical "ones" in the character. 
The printer checks for an odd number of "ones" and 
flags a parity error if there is an odd number of 
"ones" constituting the data bits including the 
parity bit. 


Space 


The parity bit set by the host to a logical zero bit. 
The printer checks the parity bit for zero and flags a 
parity error if it is a logical one. 


Mark 


The parity bit set by the host to a logical one bit. 
The printer checks the parity bit of one and flags a 
parity error if it is a logical zero. 



Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a parity setting: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Parity is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display menu. 



GEK-99044 



5-23 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Parity 



No Parity Bit< 



Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Parity will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 
Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



Stop Bits 



Serial Setup 



Stop Bits 



Stop Bits 



1< 



This sub-menu is used to configure the number of stop bits per 
character setting for the serial setup. Set the number of stop bits 
equal to that of the host computer. There are two settings under the 
Stop Bits option, 1 or 2. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a stop bits setting: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Stop Bits is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display menu. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Stop Bits will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 
Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



Baud Rate 



Serial Setup 

Baud Rate 



Baud Rate 



1200 



This sub-menu is used to configure a baud rate setting for the serial 
setup. See Set Up Menu Map in Appendix I for a complete listing of 
available selections. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a baud rate setting: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Baud Rate is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display menu. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Baud Rate will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired selection is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 
Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will now immediately follow the enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-24 



GEK-99044 



High Trip Pt% 



Serial Setup 

High Trip PT% 



High Trip Pt% 



80 



This sub-menu is used to configure a High Trip Point setting for the 
serial setup as a percentage of total buffer size. This setting 
configures the point where the printer transmits a signal to the host 
when the buffer is a set percentage full. For example, the default 
setting is set to 80. This means the printer will send a full buffer 
signal to the host that the buffer is full when the buffer is 80% to 
capacity. The 20% buffer capacity acts as a cushion allowing enough 
time for the printer to process the data in its buffer while giving the 
host time to stop transmitting data before the buffer is completely 
(100%) full and data is lost. This option is a user-defined setting. 

Use the following procedures to configure a High Trip Point setting: 

1. While in the Serial Setup menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until High Trip Pt% is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display menu. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton. High Trip Pt% will be displayed in 
the upper left corner of the LCD, and the current setting will be 
displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. Notice the cursor 
(underline) is now shown under the first digit and the default 
number is 80. The four menu browse pushbuttons revert to data 
entry operation. The horizontal < ► (left or right) pushbuttons 
position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; the 
vertical ▲ T (up or down pushbuttons increment/ decrement the 
selected digit by one. 

3. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. Repeat this step if further changes are necessary. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



Expansion 1 / Expansion2 



InterfaceSettgs 

Expansion 1 



This menu option is used to configure the settings for the I/O cards 
in the two expansion slots located in the rear of the printer. The 
options under Expansion 1 or Expansion2 are the same. If not 
labeled, Expansion 1 slot is closest to the left side of the printer while 
facing the rear of the printer. Make changes to Expansion 1 or 
Expansion2 settings according to the slot installed. There are six 
sub-menus under this menu. 

Use the following procedures to select this menu option: 

1. While in the InterfaceSettgs menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Expansion 1 or Expansion2 is 
located in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse, or the Select pushbutton, to 
access the Expansion 1 or Expansion2 menu. 

The following describes the selections available: 



GEK-99044 



5-25 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Expansion 1 

Legacy Parallel 



Legacy Parallel 

l/F Type 



Legacy Parallel 

This sub-menu is used to configure Legacy Parallel settings for the 
Legacy Parallel I/O card installed in the expansion slot of the printer. 
There are 2 sub-menus under this option, I/F Type and I/F Straps. 

Use the following procedure to access this option: 

1. While in the Expansionl or Expansion2 menu, press the < (left) 
or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until Legacy Parallel is 
displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Legacy Parallel will 
be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until I/F 
Type is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the I/F 
Type options. A currently active option will be displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD immediately followed by the < 
symbol. 

The following describes the selections available. 



Centronics 



I/F Type 



Centronics< 



I/F Straps 



H Bits 01-32 



H Bits 01-32 



01 



H Bits 01-32 



OK 



This menu is used to enable /disable the I/F Straps for Centronics. 
These are also known as hardware straps. See Table 1 in Appendix G 
for hardware strap descriptions. 

Use the following procedures to access the Centronics option: 

1. While in the I/F Type menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Centronics is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the I/F 
Straps options.) I/F Straps will be displayed in the upper left 
corner of the display. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
range of H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33 - 64 is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to access H Bits 01 -32 or H Bits 33 - 
64. H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33 - 64 will be displayed in the upper 
left corner of the LCD. 

5. Depending on the H Bits menu selected, use the < (left) or ► 
(right) menu browse pushbutton until the desired H Bit strap is 
displayed (01-32 or 33-64.) Press the Select pushbutton to 
enable/ disable an H Bit strap. The < symbol will immediately 
follow an enabled H Bit strap. 

6. Press the Clear, or A (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
menu. 



DP(Short) 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-26 



GEK-99044 



I/F Type 



DP(Short) 



I/F Straps 



H Bits 01-32 



H Bits 01-32 



01 



H Bits 01-32 



OK 



This menu is used to enable/ disable the I/F Straps for DP(Short) I/O 
Card (optional interface card.) These are also known as hardware 
straps. See Table 1 in Appendix G for hardware strap descriptions. 

Use the following procedures to access the DP(Short) option: 

1. While in the I/F Type menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until DP(Short) is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Y (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the I/F 
Straps options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
range of H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33-64 is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to access H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33 - 
64. H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33 - 64 will be displayed in the upper 
left corner of the LCD. 

5. Depending on the H Bits menu selected, use the < (left) or ► 
(right) menu browse pushbutton until the desired H Bit strap is 
displayed (01-32 or 33 - 64.) Press the Select pushbutton to 
enable/ disable an H Bit strap. The < symbol will immediately 
follow an enabled H Bit strap. 

6. Press the, Clear or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
menu. 



DP(Long) 



I/F Type 



DP(Long) 



I/F Straps 



H Bits 01-32 



H Bits 01-32 



01 



H Bits 01-32 



OK 



This menu is used to enable/ disable the I/F Straps for DP(Long) I/O 
Card (optional interface card.) These are also known as hardware 
straps. See Table 1 in Appendix G for hardware strap descriptions. 

Use the following procedures to access the DP(Long) option: 

1. While in the I/F Type menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until DP(Long) is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the I/F 
Straps options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
range of H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33 - 64 is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to access H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33 - 
64. H Bits 01 - 32 or H Bits 33 - 64 will be displayed in the upper 
left corner of the LCD. 

5. Depending on the H Bits menu selected, use the < (left) or ► 
(right) menu browse pushbutton until the desired H Bit strap is 
displayed (01-32 or 33 - 64.) Press the Select pushbutton to 
enable/ disable an H Bit strap. The < symbol will immediately 
follow an enabled H Bit strap. 

6. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
menu. 



GEK-99044 



5-27 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



I/F Straps 



Legacy Parallel 
l/F Straps 



l/F Straps 



Bits 01-32 



Bits 01-32 



01 



Bits 01-32 



OK 



This menu is used to enable/ disable the I/F Straps for the Legacy 
Parallel I/O card (optional interface card.) These are also known as 
software straps. See Table 2 in Appendix G for additional 
information. 

Use the following procedures to access the I/F Straps for Legacy 
Parallel: 

1. While in the Legacy Parallel menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until l/F Straps is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the l/F 
Straps. I/F Straps will be displayed in the upper left corner of the 
LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until Bits 
01 - 32 or Bits 33 - 64 is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to access Bits 01 - 32 or Bits 33 - 64. 

5. Depending on the Bits menu selected, use the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until the desired Bit strap is displayed 
(01-32 or 33 - 64.) Press the Select pushbutton to 

enable/ disable a Bit strap. The < symbol will immediately follow 
an enabled Bit strap. 

6. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
menu. 



Expansion 1 

Token Ring 



Token Ring 

16 MBit Speed 



Token Ring 

This menu is used to select the MBit speed for Token Ring usage 
(optional interface card.) Use the following procedures to select the 
MBit speed for Token Ring: 

1. While in Expansionl or Expansion2 menu, press the < (left) or ► 
(right) menu browse pushbutton until Token Ring is displayed in 
the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) pushbutton. Token Ring will be displayed in 
the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired Mbit speed is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable a setting. 
The < symbol will immediately follow an enabled Mbit speed 
setting. 

4. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-28 



GEK-99044 



Expansion 1 


Coax 




Coax 


Emulation 




Emulation 


6408< 



Expansion 1 


Twinax 




Twin ax 


Emulation 




Emulation 


6408< 



Coax 

This menu is used to configure the Coax settings, Emulation, Buffer 
Size, and Early Complete. These options are only visible with the 
appropriate software, SCS or IPDS, and TX/CX I/O card installed in 
either expansion slot 1 or 2. 

Note 

Under Emulation, 6408 is the only available option for IPDS. 

See Setup Menu Map in Appendix I for options available. 
Use the following procedures to access the Coax options: 

1. While in the Expansion 1/2 menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Coax is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Coax will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired setting is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
options. Press the Select pushbutton to enable/ disable a setting. 
The < symbol will immediately follow an enabled coax setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 

Twinax 

This menu is used to configure the Twinax settings, Emulation, 
Station Addr, and Buffer Size. These options are only visible with the 
appropriate software, SCS or IPDS, and TX/CX I/O card installed in 
either expansion slot 1 or 2. See Setup Menu Map for available 
options available. 

Use the following procedures to access the Twinax options: 

1. While in the Expansion 1/2 menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Twinax is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Twinax will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired setting is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
options. Press the Select pushbutton to enable/ disable a setting. 
The < symbol will immediately follow an enabled twinax setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



GEK-99044 



5-29 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Expansion 1 



TCP/IP 



TCP/IP 



IP Address 



IP Address 

000.000.000.000 



TCP/IP 

This menu is used to configure the TCP/IP settings, IP Address, 
Netmask, Router IP Addr, and Frame Type. These options are user- 
defined options. 

Use the following procedures to set the TCP/IP settings: 

1. While in the Expansion 1 or Expansion2 menu, press the A (left) 
or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until TCP/IP is displayed in 
the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
TCP/IP menu options. TCP/IP is displayed in the upper left corner 
of the LCD. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired menu setting is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. Press the Select pushbutton to access the menu desired. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton again to enable or disable a setting 
option. The < symbol will immediately follow an enabled TCP/IP 
setting. IP Address, Netmask, and Router IP Address are user set 
options. 

5. Pressing the Clear pushbutton will exit the current option menu 
option, so that selection of another option may be made. 

Use the following procedures to use these settings: 

1 . The option to be set will be displayed in the upper right corner of 
the LCD. (The example to the left is for the IP Address setting.) 
Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
The horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons 
position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; the 
vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbuttons 
increment/ decrement the selected digit by one. 

2. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. Cycle power 
after entries to activate changes. 



Expansion 1 



Netware 



Netware 



Frame Type 



Frame Type 



802.3 < 



Netware 

This menu is used to select the Frame Type for Novell Netware Use 
the following procedures to select a Frame Type for Netware. 

1. While in the Expansionl or Expansion2 menu, press the < (left) 
or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until Netware is displayed 
in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) pushbutton. Netware will be displayed in the 
upper left corner of the LCD and Frame Type will be displayed in 
the lower right corner. 

3. Press the T (down) pushbutton again. Frame Type will be 
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-30 



GEK-99044 



4. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

5. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will immediately follow an enabled option. 



ENGINE OPTIONS 



SetUp 



Engine Options 



This menu and its sub-menus are used to control the shuttle motor 
and print wire actuator tiers. 

Use the following procedure to access the Engine Options sub- 
menus: 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Engine Options is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Engine Options sub-menus. 

The following describes the sub-menus and options available: 



Direction 



Engine Options 

Direction 



Direction 

Bi-directional< 



This menu is used to control the firing or the print wires in 
relationship to the swing of the shuttle. Bi-directional mode allows 
printing during both the left and right shuttle swing (normal 
operation.) 

Printing only in left or right swing of the shuttle is used for trouble- 
shooting and alignment purposes. A slight increase in the quality of 
printing may be realized using a single-swing option due to the 
characteristics of the timing. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Engine Options menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Direction is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Direction options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



EngineOff Delay 



This menu is used to set the power-off delay for the shuttle motor. 
This delay is the time between the moment when no print data is 
detected and the moment when the shuttle motor is shut off. A short 
delay time is preferred. If the host is sending data slower than the 
printer can print, a longer delay may prevent the time lost when the 
shuttle is turned off and cycled back on again. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 



GEK-99044 



5-31 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Engine Options 

EngineOff Delay 



EngineOff Delay 

2 Seconds< 



1. While in the Engine Options menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu pushbutton until EngineOff Delay is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
EngineOff Delay options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Print Intensity 



Engine Options 
Print Intensity 



Print Intensity 



Normal< 



This menu is used to set the print intensity (striking power) of the 
print head actuators. Normal intensity is the default setting of this 
printer. It gives excellent print quality while extending the life of the 
print actuators and the ribbon fabric. High intensity is used when 
heavy multipart forms show a need for more print impact on the last 
copy. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Engine Options menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu pushbutton until Print Intensity is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Print 
Intensity options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



PRINT CONTROL 



SetUp 



Print Control 



This menu and its sub-menus are used to set printer response to line 
termination and certain positioning commands sent by the host 
system. 

Use the following procedures to access the Print Control sub-menus 
and options: 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Print Control is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Print 
Control sub-menus. 

The following describes the sub-menus and options available: 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-32 



GEK-99044 



Define LF 



Print Control 



Define LF 



Define LF 

LF = CR + LF< 



This menu is used to define the action of the printer upon receiving a 
line feed character. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Print Control menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Define LF is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Define 
LF options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Define CR 



Print Control 

Define CR 



Define CR 



CR = CR < 



This menu is used to define the action of the printer upon receiving a 
carriage return character. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Print Control menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Define CR is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Define CR options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Define FF 



Print Control 



Define FF 



Define FF 



FF = FF< 



This menu is used to define the action of the printer, upon receiving a 
form feed character. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Print Control menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Define FF is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Define 
FF options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



GEK-99044 



5-33 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Define HT 



Print Control 

Define HT 



Define HT 

Notabs = SPACE< 



This menu is used to define the action of the printer upon receiving a 
horizontal tab character. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Print Control menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Define T is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Define 
HT options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



VertMove 



Print Control 



VertMove 



VertMove 

VM=CR+VM< 



This menu is used to define the vertical movement behavior for the 
printer. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Print Control menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until VertMove is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
VertMove options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



AutoWrap 



Print Control 

AutoWrap 



AutoWrap 



Enable< 



This menu is used to enable /disable the auto wrapping option for the 
printer. If set to enable, autowrapping will occur at the right margin. 
If this option is disabled, no auto wrap will occur and data will be 
truncated. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Print Control menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until AutoWrap is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
AutoWrap options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-34 



GEK-99044 



FF @ TOF 



Print Control 
FF 



TOF 



FF @ TOF 



Enable< 



This menu is used to define form feed with top of form behavior for 
the printer. If enabled, the printer will ignore a form feed character, if 
the printer is already at the top of form. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Print Control menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until FF @ TOF is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the FF @ 
TOF options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



GenPtrOpts 



SetUp 



GenPtrOpts 



GenPtrOpts 



Group 1 



Group 1 



OK 



This menu is used to set general printer options. See "General Printer 
Options Definitions," table 3 and 4, in Appendix G for additional 
information. 

Note 

To print the Euro currency symbol, see Table 3 and 4 in 
Appendix G for settings. 

Use the following procedures to select an option: 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press < (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbutton until GenPtrOpts is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
GenPtrOpts options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired Group 1 or Group 2 is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select Group 1 or Group 2. 

5. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to either 
enable or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow 
an enabled option. 



TEAROFF 



SetUp 



TearOff 



This menu and its sub-menus are used to modify the tear off feature 
settings for this printer. 

Use the following procedures to access the sub-menus: 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until TearOff is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 



GEK-99044 



5-35 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
TearOff submenu options. 

The following describes the TearOff sub-menus and options: 



Path 



TearOff 



Path 



Path 



Top< 



This menu is used to select the rear or top paper path used for the 
printer. This menu is only applicable and visible for the 5050/5100 
(55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model printer. 

Use the following procedures to select a paper path: 

1. While in the TearOff menu, press < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Path is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Path 
options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Note 

See "Paper Path" in Chapter 2 for additional procedures to 
printing using a top paper path. 



Retract 



TearOff 



Retract 



Retract 



Next TOF< 



This menu is used to select the length of the paper retraction. Next 
TOF will retract the paper to the next TOF as currently set for the 
printer. Full Return will retract the paper only the length of a line 
return as currently set for the printer. 

Use the following procedures to select the length: 

1. While in the TearOff menu, press A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Retract is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Retract options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Auto 



This menu is used to enable/ disable the auto tear off feature. If 
enabled the printer will automatically eject the paper to the selected 
tear off position after a selected timeout after the shuttle stops. 

Use the following procedures to set the auto features. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-36 



GEK-99044 



TearOff 



Auto 



Auto 



Disable< 



Auto 



Time 



Time 



00:00 



1. While in the TearOff menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Auto is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 



2. 



Press the 
options. 



T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Auto 



If the auto feature is enabled, there are two additional settings to be 
configured. A Time Setting configures the printer for a specific period 
of time to wait after all data is printed before ejecting the paper. A 
Start Eject setting configures the printer to advance to the tear off 
position after the Time Setting has elapsed from anywhere on the 
paper (Timeout Only) or after the Time Setting has elapsed only if at 
the top of form position. 

The following describes the additional settings if Enable is selected. 

1 . Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Enable is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the Enable options. Auto 
will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD and the 
available options will display in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to select 
the desired submenu. The Time option is user set. The range of 
values for the time option is 1 to 10 seconds. 

Use the following procedures to use this setting: 

1. Press the Select pushbutton to access. The option to be set will be 
displayed in the upper right corner of the LCD. Notice the cursor 
(underline) is now shown under the first digit. The horizontal *4 

► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons position the cursor 
(underline) under the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or 
down) menu browse pushbuttons increment/ decrement the 
selected digit by one. There is a maximum allowed setting of 
10:00. 

2. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. Repeat this set if further changes are necessary. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



EMULATION 



SetUp 



Emulation 



This menu and sub-menus are used to select a printer emulation 
setting and configure its settings. 

Use the following procedure to select this option. 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Emulation is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Emulation submenus. 



GEK-99044 



5-37 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



The following describes accessing the submenus and options: 



ANSI (4800) 



Emulation 



ANSI (4800) 



ANSI (4800) 



Options 



This menu is used to select the ANSI (4800) emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 5, in Appendix G for additional 
information. 

Use the following to configure the ANSI (4800) emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until ANSI (4800) is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 



ANSI (4800) 
01 



2. 

3. 

4. 



Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for ANSI 
(4800). ANSI (4800) will be displayed in the upper left corner of the 
LCD and Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 



Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an ANSI (4800) setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



ANSI (4410) 



Emulation 



ANSI (4410) 



ANSI (4410) 



Options 



ANSI (4410) 
01 



This menu is used to select the ANSI (4410) emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 6, in Appendix G for additional 
information. 

Use the following to configure the ANSI (4410) emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until ANSI (4410) is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for ANSI(4410). 
ANSI (4410) will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD 
and Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 

4. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an ANSI (4410) setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-38 



GEK-99044 



FX286E 



Emulation 



FX286e 



FX286e 



Options 



FX286e 
01 



This menu is used to select the FX286e emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 8, in Appendix G for additional 
information. 

Use the following to configure the FX286e emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until FX286e is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for FX286e. 
FX286e will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD and 
Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 

4. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable a FX286e setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



ProPrinter 



Emulation 

ProPrinter 


1. 




ProPrinter 

Options 


2. 




3. 


ProPrinter 
01 


4. 



This menu is used to select the ProPrinter emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 7, in Appendix G for additional 
information. 

Use the following to configure the ProPrinter emulation settings: 

While in the Emulation menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until ProPrinter is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for ProPrinter. 
ProPrinter will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD 
and Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 

Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable a ProPrinter setting. 



5. Press the Clear, or A 
option. 



(up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 



GEK-99044 



5-39 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



P 300/600 



Emulation 



P 300/600 



P 300/600 



Options 



P 300/600 
01 



This menu is used to select the P 300/600 emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 1 1, in Appendix G for 
additional information. 

Use the following to configure the P 300/600 emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until P 300/600 is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for P 300/600. P 
300/600 will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD and 
Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 

4. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable a P 300/600 setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



DECLG 



Emulation 



DECLG 



DECLG 



Options 



DECLG 
01 



This menu is used to select the DEC LG emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 12, in Appendix G for 
additional information. 

Use the following to configure the DEC LG emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until DEC LG is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for DEC LG. 
DEC LG will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD and 
Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 

4. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable a DEC LG setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-40 



GEK-99044 



Pseries 



Emulation 



Pseries 



Pseries 



Options 



PSeries 
01 



This menu is used to select the Pseries emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 10, in Appendix G for 
additional information. 

Note 

Under the menu option SFCC, the user defines a SFCC character. 

Use the following to configure the Pseries emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the ^ (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Pseries is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for Pseries. 
Pseries will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD and 
Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 

4. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable a Pseries setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



DEC PPL3 



Emulation 



DEC PPL3 



DEC PPL3 



Options 



DEC PPL3 
01 



This menu is used to select the DEC PPL3 emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 13 in Appendix G for 
additional information. 

Use the following to configure the DEC PPL3 emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the -4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until DEC PPL3 is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for DEC PPL3. 
DEC PPL3 will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD 
and Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to access the options menu. 

4. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable a DEC PPL3 setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or A (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



GEK-99044 



5-41 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



ESC/P2 



Emulation 



ESC/P2 



ESC/P2 



Options 



ESC/P2 
01 



This menu is used to select the ESC/P2 emulation. See "I/F 
Emulation Option Descriptions," table 9, in Appendix G for additional 
information. 

Use the following to configure the ESC/P2 emulation settings: 

1. While in the Emulation menu, press the *4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until ESC/P2 is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the settings for ESC/P2. 
ESC/P2 will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD and 
Options will be displayed in the lower right corner. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to access the Options under ESC/P2. 

4. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an ESC/P2 setting. 

5. Press the Clear, or ▲ (up) menu browse, pushbutton to exit this 
option. 



DISPLAY LAN 



SetUp 



Display Lang 



Display Lang 



English< 



This menu is used to select the LCD language. At present writing, the 
only option under this menu is English. Future languages will 
include Spanish, German, Italian and French. 

Use the following procedures to select the language displayed in the 
LCD: 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Display Lang is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Display Lang options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired language is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to enable or disable an option. The < 
symbol will immediately follow the enabled option. 



FILTER 



SetUp 



Filter 



This menu option is used to select and configure settings for QMS, 
IGP, IPDS* and IBM Format*. 

Use the following procedures to use this option. 

1. While in the Set Up menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Filter is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Filter 
options. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-42 



GEK-99044 



* Viewable with SCS or IPDS software installed in printer. 
The following describes the sub-menus and options available: 



QMS 



Filter 



QMS 



QMS 



BC Density 



BC Density 



Stagger< 



This menu option is used to select the QMS filter option. 
Use the following procedures to access the QMS options: 

1. While in the Filter menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until QMS is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
configuration settings for QMS. 

The following describes the options available: 

BC Density 

This menu option is used to select the BC Density setting for QMS. 
This option is used to select the barcode print density in QMS 
emulation. Low represents low density, High represents double 
horizontal, and Stagger represents staggered format. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until BC Density is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the BC 
Density options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



GEK-99044 



5-43 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Control Chars 

This menu option is used to select the Control Chars setting for QMS. 
This option designates the hex value for the desired graphic control 
character in QMS emulation. See table below. 



Hex Value 


Character 


0X5E 


A 


0X60 




0X7C 


1 

1 


0X7E 


~ 


OXAA 


—i 


OXBO 




OX01 


<SOH> 


0X21 




0X3B 


» 


0X3F 


o 


0X40 


@ 


0X5C 


\ 



QMS 



Control Chars 



Control Chars 



0X7E< 



Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Control Chars is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Control Chars options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



QMS 



Language 



Language 

English (USA)< 



Language 

This menu option is used to select the Language setting for QMS. 
This option permits the selection of twelve International Standards 
Organization (ISO) character sets as the power-up default character 
set. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Language is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Language options. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-44 



GEK-99044 



3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



QMS 



CodeV 



CodeV 



Disable< 



QMS 



Free Format 



Free Format 



Disable< 



CodeV 

This menu is used to select the Code V setting for QMS. This option 
disables/enables the printer to recognize and process Code V 
emulation. When this option is disabled, the printer will not accept 
any Code V commands until it receives the A PY A - command. When 
enabled, the printer accepts and processes all Code V emulations as 
though the A PY A - command had been sent. 

Note 

Code V is always active without the A PY controls. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Code V is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Code 
V options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Free Format 

This menu is used to select the Free Format setting for QMS. This 
option of enabled sets the printer to ignore all characters with 
hexadecimal values less than 20H. This includes all system paper 
movement commands. This option will be turned off when the printer 
received the a O a - command. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the *4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Free Format is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Free 
Format options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



GEK-99044 



5-45 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Ignore Mode 



QMS 



Ignore Mode 



Ignore Mode 



Disable< 



This menu is used to select the Ignore Mode (Ignore Data Mode) 
setting for QMS. When Ignore Mode is enabled, the printer ignores all 
data received from the host until a A A is received. If this option is 
enabled, Code V must also be enabled. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Ignore Default is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Ignore 
Default options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



QMS 



Slashed Zero 



Slashed Zero 



Disable< 



Slashed Zero 

This menu is used to select the Slashed Zero setting for QMS. When 
enabled, the Slashed Zero option will print slashes in zeros, e.g.. "0." 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the *4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Slashed Zero is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the ▼ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Slashed Zero options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



QMS 



PY Terminator 



PY Terminator 



CR< 



PY Terminator 

This menu is used to select either the CR or CR LF as the PY 
Terminator setting for QMS. The "PY A - magnum on command should 
be terminated with <CR><LF>. With this option set to LF, the <LF> is 
ignored. It may also be terminated by a carriage return/ linefeed 
combination. The linefeed causes printing to begin on the second line 
of the program. If printing on the first line is desired, set this option 
to CR. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until PY Terminator is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the PY 
Terminator options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-46 



GEK-99044 



QMS 



PN Terminator 



PN Terminator 



CR< 



QMS 



Vertical DPI 



Vertical DPI 



72< 



QMS 



LPI Grid 



LPI Grid 



Disable< 



or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

PN Terminator 

This menu is used to select either the CR or CR LF as the PN 
Terminator setting for QMS. The command to turn off the graphics 
conversion ( A PN A -) may be terminated by a carriage return/ linefeed 
combination. If no linefeed is desired when QMS is turned off, set this 
option to CR. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until PN Terminator is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the PN 
Terminator options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Vertical DPI 

This menu is used to select the Vertical DPI setting for QMS. This is 
used to specify the desired Vertical Dots Per Inch in Code V Version I. 
If set to 70, a one-inch (1") high character (as called for in a Magnum 
command) will be 70/72 of an inch high. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the *4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Vertical DPI is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Vertical DPI options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

LPI Grid 

This menu is used to select the LPI Grid setting for QMS. When 
enabled, a linefeed <LF> after a graphics pass will put the paper on 
the next LPI grid position. If disabled, a linefeed after a graphics move 
will move the paper using the LPI increment. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the ^ (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until LPI Grid is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the LPI 
Grid options. 



GEK-99044 



5-47 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



QMS 



Version 



Version 



VerK 



Version 

This menu is used to select the Version setting for QMS. This feature 
is provided for users of Code V Version I programming who utilized 
rotated MAGNUM characters. Elongation of characters could cause 
print line length to be exceeded. Setting this option to Ver I, will 
prevent character elongation from causing print line overflow. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Version is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Version options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



QMS 



Magnum Spaces 



Version 



Disable< 



QMS 



Ignore Chr Mode 



Magnum Spaces 

This menu is used to select the Magnum Spaces setting for QMS. 
When Magnum Spaces is enabled, trailing spaces in strings are 
ignored. If a Magnum pass field contains only spaces, the defined 
height of the field is ignored. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Magnum Spaces is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Magnum Spaces options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Ignore Chr Mode 

This menu is used to select the Ignore Character Mode setting for 
QMS. When Ignore Chr Mode is enabled, the character value 
specified in Ignore Char option will be discarded when detected in the 
datastream. If this option is enabled, a character must be designated 
to be discarded using the Ignore Char (see next option.) 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Ignore Chr Mode is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-48 



GEK-99044 



Ignore Chr Mode 

Disable< 



Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Ignore 
Chr Mode options. 

Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



QMS 



Ignore Char 



Ignore Char 



00 



Ignore Char 

This menu option is used to set the hexadecimal value of the received 
data character to be ignored when the Ignore Chr Mode is enabled. 
The valid range of hexadecimal values is 0X00 to 0XFF. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the QMS menu, press the ^ (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Ignore Character is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the Ignore Character 

options. 

3. This option is user set. Notice the cursor (underline) is now 
shown under the first digit. The horizontal < ► (left or right) 
menu browse pushbuttons to position the cursor (underline) 
under the digit to be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or down) 
menu browse pushbutton increment/ decrement the selected 
alphanumeric digit by one. Enter the hex value of the character 
desired. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. Repeat this step if further changes are necessary. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton to exit this option. 



IGP 



Filter 



IGP 



This menu option is used to select the IGP filter option. 
Use the following procedures to access the IGP options: 

1. While in the Filter menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IGP is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
configuration settings for IGP. 

The following describes the options available: 



BC Density 

This menu option is used to select the BC Density setting for IGP. 
This option is used to select the barcode print density in QMS 
emulation. Low represents low density, High represents double 
horizontal, and Stagger represents staggered format. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 



GEK-99044 



5-49 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



IGP 



BC Density 



BC Density 



Stagger< 



1. While in the IGP menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until BC Density is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the BC 
Density options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Control Chars 

This menu option is used to select the Control Chars setting for IGP. 
This is used to designate the hexadecimal value for the desired 
graphic control character in IGP emulation. Menu selections are in 
hex. 



Hex Value 


Character 


0X5E 


A 


0X60 




0X7C 


1 

1 


0X7E 


~ 


OXAA 


—i 


OXBO 




OX01 


<SOH> 


0X21 




0X3B 


» 


0X3F 


o 


0X40 


@ 


0X5C 


\ 



IGP 



Control Chars 



Control Chars 



0X7E< 



Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Control Chars is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Control Chars options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-50 



GEK-99044 



Language 



IGP 



Language 



Language 



ASCIK 



IGP 



IGP Terminator 



IGP Terminator 

CRLF< 



This menu option is used to select the Language setting for IGP. This 
option permits the selection of twelve International Standards 
Organization (ISO) character sets as the power-up default character 
set. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Language is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Language options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

IGP Terminator 

This menu option is used to select the IGP Terminator setting for IGP. 
When set to CR, all IGP commands are required to be terminated 
with a carriage return. When set to CR LF, all IGP commands are 
required to be terminated with a linefeed. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IGP Terminator is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the IGP 
Terminator options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



IGP 



Quiet Mode 



Quiet Mode 



Disable< 



Quiet Mode 

This menu option is used to select the Quiet Mode setting for IGP. 
When enabled, all IGP commands are passes unprocessed to the 
printer (printed as text.) Disabling this option, or receiving a LISTEN 
command, will disable Quiet Mode. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Quiet Mode is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Quiet 
Mode options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 



GEK-99044 



5-51 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



IGP 



Delete Logos 



Delete Logos 



Disable< 



IGP 



Default OCR-B 



Default OCR-B 

Disable< 



IGP 



Vertical DPI 



Vertical DPI 



72< 



or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Delete Logos 

This menu option is used to select the Delete Logos setting for IGP. 
When enabled, logos that are associated with a form will be deleted 
when the form is deleted. To conserve IGP memory, all forms and 
logos should be deleted when they are no longer required. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Delete Logos is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Delete 
Logos options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Default OCR-B 

This menu option is used to select the Default OCR-B setting for IGP. 
When enabled, the default font will be OCR-B. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Default OCR-B is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Default OCR-B options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Vertical DPI 

This menu option is used to select the Vertical DPI setting for IGP. 
This is used to specify the desired Vertical Dots Per Inch in Code V 
Version I. If set to 70, a one-inch (1") high character (as called for in a 
Magnum command) will be 70/72 of an inch high. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Vertical DPI is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Vertical DPI options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-52 



GEK-99044 



IGP 



Slashed Zero 



Slashed Zero 



Disable< 



IGP 



Clip Text 



Clip Text 



Disable< 



or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Slashed Zero 

This menu option is used to select the Slashed Zero setting for IGP. 
When enabled, the Slashed Zero option will print slashes in zeros, 
e.g.. "0." 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Slashed Zero is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Slashed Zero options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Clip Text 

This menu option is used to select the Clip Text (Excess Form Text 
Ignored) setting for IGP. When enabled, the Clip Text option will not 
print any text that exceeds the IGP form length. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Clip Text is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Clip 
Text options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



IGP 



Ignore Chr Mode 



Ignore Chr Mode 

Disable< 



Ignore Chr Mode 

This menu option is used to select the Ignore Character Mode setting 
for IGP. When enabled, the character value specified in the Ignore 
Char option will be discarded when detected in the datastream. 

Note 

When enabled, a character must be designated to be discarded 
using the Ignore Char option. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Ignore Chr Mode is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Ignore 
Chr Mode options. 



GEK-99044 



5-53 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



IGP 



Ignore Char 



Ignore Char 



00 



3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Ignore Char 

This menu option is used to select the Ignore Character setting for 
IGP. This specifies the decimal value (0 to 25) of the character to be 
ignored within the datastream. The Ignore Chr Mode must be enabled 
for this option to take effect. This is user set. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IGP menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Ignore Character is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the Ignore Character 

options. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
The horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons to 
position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; the 
vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbutton 
increment/ decrement the selected alphanumeric digit by one. 
Enter the hex value of the character desired. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. Repeat this step if further changes are necessary. 

5. Press the Clear pushbutton to exit this option. 

Note 
Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



IPDS 



Filter 



IPDS 



This menu option is used to select the IPDS (Intelligent Print Data 
Stream) filter options. 

Use the following procedures to access the IPDS options: 

1. While in the Filter menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IPDS is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
configuration settings for IPDS. 

The following describes the options available: 

IPDS BC Stagger 

This menu option is used to select the IPDS BC Stagger setting for 
IPDS. When enabled, the barcode printing is faster at a lower print 
quality. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-54 



GEK-99044 



IPDS 

IPDS BC Stagger 



IPDS BC Stagger 

Enable< 



3. While in the IPDS menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IPDS BC Stagger is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the IPDS 
BC Stagger options. 

5. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



IPDS 



IPDS BC Density 



IPDS BC Density 

Low< 



IPDS 

IPDS GR Density 



IPDS GR Density 

Low< 



IPDS BC Density 

This menu option is used to select the IPDS BC Density setting for 
IPDS. This option is used to select the barcode print density in IPDS 
emulations. Low is 72 dots horizontally by 72 dots vertically and High 
is 144 dots horizontally by 144 vertically. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IPDS menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IPDS BC Density is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the IPDS 
BC Density options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

IPDS GR Density 

This menu option is used to select the IPDS GR Density setting for 
IPDS. Used to select graphic print density in IPDS emulations. Low is 
72 dots per inch and High is 144 dots per inch. Higher density means 
better print quality, but at a lower speed. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IPDS menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IPDS GR Density is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the IPDS 
GR Density options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

IPDS Image Density 

This menu option is used to select the IPDS Image Density setting for 
IPDS. This is used to select image density/ quality in IPDS 
emulations. Low is 72 dots per inch and High is 144 dots per inch. 
Higher density means better print quality, but at a lower speed. 



GEK-99044 



5-55 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



IPDS 
IPDS Image Density 



IPDS Image Density 
Low< 



IPDS 



IPDS Dens Ovr 



IPDS Dens Ovr 

Disable< 



Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IPDS menu, press the ^ (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IPDS Image Density is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the IPDS 
Image Density options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

IPDS Dens Ovr 

This menu option is used to select the IPDS Dens Ovr (IPDS Density 
Override) setting for IPDS. When enabled, the printer will override 
any IPDS command attempting to change the IPDS BC Density, IPDS 
GR Density, IPDS Image Density, and IPDS Text. The current menu 
values are used. When disabled, the individual density/ quality values 
my be set by IPDS commands. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IPDS menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IPDS Dens Ovr is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the IPDS 
Dens Ovr options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



IBM Format 



Filter 



IBM Format 



This menu option is used to configure the settings in the IBM Format 
filter option. These options are for IPDS and SCS. See the Setup 
Menu in Appendix I for a complete listing of available selections. 

Use the following procedures to access the IBM Format options: 

1. While in the Filter menu, press the <4 (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until IBM Format is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
configuration settings for IBM Format. 

The following describes the options available: 

Code Page 

This menu option is used to select the default Code Page setting for 
IBM Format. See the Set Up Menu Map in Appendix I for a complete 
listing of available selections. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-56 



GEK-99044 



IBM Format 

Code Page 



Code Page 



037< 



1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Code Page is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Code 
Page options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



IBM Format 

Code Pg Override 



Code Pg Override 

Disable< 



IBM Format 

LPI Override 



LPI Override 



Disable< 



Code Pg Override 

This menu option is used to enable/ disable the Code Page Override 
options. When enabled, the printer will override any host-set 
command, which attempts to change the Code Page value. The 
current menu value is used. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Code Pg Override is displayed in 
the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Code 
Pg Override options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the pushbutton to enable or 
disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

LPI Override 

This option is used to enable/ disable the LPI Override setting. When 
enabled, the printer will override any host-set command, which 
attempts to change the lines per inch value. The current operator-set 
value is used. 

Use the following procedure to enable/ disable an option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu option, press the < (left) or ► 
(right) pushbutton until LPI Override is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) pushbutton to access the LPI Override menu 
options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

CPI Override 

This menu option is used to select the CPI Override setting for IBM 
Format. When enable, the printer will override any host-set command 
which attempts to change the characters per inch value. The current 



GEK-99044 



5-57 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



IBM Format 

CPI Override 



CPI Override 



Disable< 



IBM Format 

MMP Override 



MMP Override 

Disable< 



IBM Format 

MPL Override 



MPL Override 

Disable< 



operator-set value will be used. See the Set Up Menu Map in 
Appendix I for a complete listing of available selections. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu option, press the < (left) or ► 
(right) menu browse pushbutton until CPI Override is displayed in 
the lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the CPI 
Override options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

MPP Override 

This menu option is used to enable/ disable the MPP Override 
options. When enabled, the printer will override any host-set 
command, which attempts to change the MPP (maximum print 
position) value to anything other than the current menu value. The 
operator-set value is used. 

Use the following procedure to enable /disable this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until MPP Override is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the MPP 
Override options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

MPL Override 

This menu option is used to enable/ disable the MPL Override Option. 
When enabled, the printer will override any host-set command, which 
attempts to change the MPL (maximum print lines) value to anything 
other than the operator-set value. 

Use the following procedure to enable /disable this option: 

6. While in the IBM Format menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until MPL Override is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

7. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the MPL 
Override options. 

8. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-58 



GEK-99044 



Override Text 



IBM Format 

Override Text 



Override Text 



Disable 



IBM Format 

Override All 



Override All 



Disable< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable the Override Text option. 
When enabled, the printer will override any host-set command, which 
attempts to change the text quality value to anything other than the 
current menu value. The operator-set value will be used. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting. 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton, until Override Text is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Override Text options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 

Override All 

This menu option is used to enable/ disable the Override All option. 
When enabled, the printer will override any host-set command, which 
attempts to change the values of Code Page, LPI, CPI, MPP, or MPL. 
Operator-set values will be used. When disabled, the individual 
override options control Code Page, LPI, CPI, MPP, or MPL. 

Use the following procedure to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Override All is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Override MMP options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



GEK-99044 



5-59 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Hex Print 



IBM Format 



Hex Print 



Hex Print 



Disable 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable the Hex Print option. This 
is used to troubleshoot communications or applications program 
problems. The received EBCDIC data stream is converted to hex 
dump format and printed. The printout can aid in determining what 
the printer is being instructed to do by the data stream. 

Use the following procedure to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Hex Print is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Hex 
Print options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



IBM Format 



HEX1 



HEX1 



00 



Hex 1 

This menu option is used to select the HEX 1 setting for IBM Format. 
This is a user set option. Hex 1 defines the first character (in 
EBCDIC) of the lead-in sequence for hex passthru. Hex passthru 
enables sending commands in the datastream to access features that 
are not available in standard IBM emulations. Hex passthru requires 
an identification of two lead-in characters (Hex 1 and Hex 2) 
indicating the beginning of the command stream and a terminating 
character (Hex Term) indicating the end of the command stream. 
Upon receipt of the two lead-in characters, the emulation controller 
begins translating the EBCDIC characters to 9 and A to F into 
hexadecimal data. Two EBCDIC characters are combined into one 
ASCII hexadecimal byte and sent to the printer. Translation 
continues until the emulation controller receives the terminating 
character. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until HEX 1 is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the HEX 1 options. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
The horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons to 
position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; the 
vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbutton 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-60 



GEK-99044 



IBM Format 



HEX 2 



HEX 2 



00 



Hex 2 

This menu option is used to select the HEX 2 setting for IBM Format. 
This option defines the second character (in EBCDIC) of the lead-in 
sequence for hex passthru. See Hex 1 for additional information. This 
is a user set option. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until HEX 2 is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the HEX 2 options. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
The horizontal A ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons to 
position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; the 
vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbutton 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



IBM Format 



HEX Term 



HEX Term 



00 



Hex Term 

This menu option is used to select the HEX Term setting for IBM 
Format. Hex Term is used to define the last character (in EBCDIC) of 
a hex passthru sequence. See Hex 1 for additional information. This 
is a user set option. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until HEX Term is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the HEX Term options. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
The horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons to 
position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; the 
vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbutton 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



DCF1 

This menu option is used to select the DCF1 setting for IBM Format. 
DCF 1, DCF 2, and DCF Term may be received in the data stream to 



GEK-99044 



5-61 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



IBM Format 



DCF1 



DCF1 



00 



modify printer functions. DCF capacity has been preserved in order 
to allow receipt of print jobs that were created for older printer 
products that do not have the LCD menu feature. All options that 
were previously set using DCF commands can now be set using the 
LCD menus. This is the preferred method. This is a user set option. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until DCF1 is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the DCF1 option. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
Use the horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons 
to position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changes; 
use the vertical A T (up or down) menu browse pushbuttons to 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



IBM Format 



DCF2 



DCF2 



00 



DCF2 

This menu option is used to select the DCF2 setting for IBM Format. 
See DCF 1 for additional information. This is a user set option. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until DCF2 is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the DCF2 options. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
Use the horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons 
to position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changes; 
use the vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbuttons to 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-62 



GEK-99044 



IBM Format 

DCF Term 



DCF Term 



00 



DCF Term 

This menu option is used to select the DCF Term setting for IBM 
Format. See DCF 1 for additional information. This is a user set 
option. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until DCF Term is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the DCF Term options. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
Use the horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons 
to position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; 
use the vertical A T (up or down) menu browse pushbuttons to 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and the 
desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



IBM Format 

Coax Com pat 



Coax Com pat 



Case 



Coax Compat 

This menu is used to configure the Coax Compat (Coax Compatibility) 
settings for IBM Format. 

Note 

Coax options are only available for IPDS and SCS. 

See Setup Menu Map in Appendix I for a complete listing of available 
selections. 

Use the following procedures to access the Coax Compatibility 
options: 

1. While in the IBM Format menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Coax Compat is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton. Coax Compatibility 
will be displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD. 

The following describes the options available. 



GEK-99044 



5-63 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Case 



Coax Com pat 



Case 



Case 



DuaK 



This menu option is used to select the Case option under Coax 
Compat. This option is valid for DSC/DSE modes only. LU-1 is 
always dual case. It causes the printer to print in upper and lower 
case when set to Dual, or in upper case only when set to Mono. See 
the Setup Menu Map for a complete listing of selections available. 

Use the following procedures to select setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu option, press the < (left) or ► 
(right) menu browse pushbuttons until Case is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 



3. 



Press the 
options. 



T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Case 



Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



LOC Copy FF 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable the LOC Copy FF 
options. This option causes the printer to execute a form feed after 
the print buffer is completed in an operator-initiated local copy print 
job. The printer ejects the page and is set to print at column 1, line 1 
of the next page. This option overrides FF End Buff to allow the 
printer to maintain compatibility with application programs designed 
for earlier printers. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 



Coax Compat 

LOC Copy FF 



LOC Copy FF 



Disable< 



1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until LOC Copy FF is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the LOC 
Copy FF options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



FF Before LC 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable the FF Before LC option. 
This option causes the printer to execute a form feed before the 
printer buffer is completed in an operator-initiated local copy print 
job. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 



Coax Compat 

FF Before LC 



1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until FF Before LC is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-64 



GEK-99044 



FF Before LC 



Disable< 



Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the FF 
Before LC options. 

Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Interv Req 



Coax Com pat 
Interv Req 



Interv Req 



Enable< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable the Interv Req 
(Intervention Required) option. When enabled, this causes an 
intervention required message to be sent to the host computer if the 
printer is busy or in an error condition. The time before sending the 
Intervention Required message is set by the Irq Err TO and Irq Bsy TO 
options. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Interv Req is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 

2. Press the ▼ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Interv 
Req options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Irq Err TO 



Coax Compat 

IRQ Err To 



IRQ Err To 



000 



This menu option is used to select the IRQ Err TO setting for Coax 
Compat. If the Interv Req option is enabled, the IRQ Err TO value 
represents the amount of time available to clear an error (such as 
paper jam or paper out, etc.) before the printer notifies the host 
computer. Each value represents 5 seconds. The default value of 12 
represents 60 seconds. This is a user set option. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until IRQ Err TO is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the Irq Err TO option. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
Use the horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons 
to position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; 
use the vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbuttons to 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and the 
desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



GEK-99044 



5-65 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



Irq Bsy TO 



Coax Com pat 
Irq Bsy To 



Irq Bsy To 



000 



This menu option is used to select the IRQ Bsy TO setting for Coax 
Compat. If the Interv Req option is enabled and the printer is offline 
for a period of time exceeding the IRQ BSY To value selected, the LCD 
display will show "ON HOLD TIMOUT" and the host will be sent an 
Intervention Required message. This is a user set option. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until IRQ Bsy TO is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to configure the Irq Bsy TO option. 

3. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the first digit. 
Use the horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse pushbuttons 
to position the cursor (underline) under the digit to be changed; 
use the vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse pushbuttons to 
increment/ decrement the selected numeric digit by one. 

4. Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and the 
desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. 



CRatMPP+1 



Coax Compat 

CRatMPP+1 



CRatMPP+1 



NL< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable a carriage return at 
maximum print position + 1 line (LU-3 mode) option. If CR at MPP+1 
is set to NL and a carriage return is executed at MPP+ 1 , a new line 
will also be executed. The next print position will be on the next line, 
column 1. If set to CR, and a carriage return is executed at MPP+1, 
no additional new line will be executed, and the next print position 
will be the current line, column 1. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until CR at MPP+1 is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the CR at 
MPP+1 options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-66 



GEK-99044 



NLatMPP+1 



Coax Com pat 

NLatMPP+1 



NLatMPP+1 



LN+2< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable a NL at MPP+1 (New Line 
at Maximum Print Position + 1 Line (LU-3 mode)) option. If NL at 
MPP+1 is set to LN +2, a new line is executed at MPP +1, and 
additional new line is executed automatically. The next print position 
will be in column 1 and down 2 lines. If set to NL, no additional new 
line is executed at MPP+1, and the next print position will be on 
column 1 of the next line. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until NL at MPP+1 is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the NL at 
MPP+1 options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



FF Data 



Coax Compat 



FF Data 



FF Data 



Col 1< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable a FF Data (Form Feed 
Followed by Data) option. When printing in LU-3 mode, the FF Data 
option is used to select the action taken if a form feed is received by 
the printer and it is not the last character in the IBM print buffer. 
When set to COL 2, the current print position after the form feed will 
be the second position on line one of the next form. If set to COL 1, 
the current print position will be the first position on line one of the 
next form. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until FF Data is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the FF 
Data options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



GEK-99044 



5-67 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



FF EndBuff 



Coax Com pat 

FF EndBuff! 



FF EndBuff 



LN 1< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable a FF EndBuff (Form Feed 
at End of Buffer) option. The FF End Buff option is used to select the 
action taken if a form feed is received by the printer and it is the last 
character in the IBM print buffer. When set to LN 2, the current print 
position after the form feed will be the first position on line two of the 
next form. If set to LN 1, the current print position will be the first 
position on line one of the next form. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until FF EndBuff is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the FF 
EndBuff options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Null Sup 



Coax Compat 



Null Sup 



Null Sup 



LC/NSCS< 



This menu option is used to select a Null Sup (Null Suppression) 
option. If Null Sup is enabled, and formatted data is received from the 
host (ignore NL, EM, CR and print spaces instead), then all lines 
consisting entirely of nonprintable characters (nulls, attributes, and 
non-display or non-print fields) will be printed as blank lines and a 
new line executed at the end of the line. The next print position after 
such a line will be on the next line, column one. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Null Sup is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Null 
Sup options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-68 



GEK-99044 



FFPos 



Coax Com pat 



FFPos 



FFPos 



CPP=1< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable a FF Pos option. Form 
feed commands may be executed anywhere or treated as blanks if 
they do not occur at MPP+ 1 , the first print position of a line (column 
one.) 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until FF Pos is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the FF 
Pos options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Auto Funct 



Coax Comp 

Auto Funct 



Auto Funct 



NL< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable an Auto Funct option. 
The Auto Funct option is used to specify what action will be taken 
when the printing of an IBM print buffer is completed. If set to FF 
(form feed), the printer will automatically execute a form feed at the 
end of the print buffer or a local copy, unless the last character 
received was already a form feed. If set to NL (new line), and the last 
character is not a form feed, new line, or carriage return, a new line 
will be automatically executed. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Auto Funct is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Auto 
Funct options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



LASTLF/FF 



Coax Compat 

LAST LF/FF 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable a LAST LF/FF (Last Line 
Feed Send as Form Feed) option. When enabled, this option will 
cause a page eject when the last character in the IBM print buffer is a 
line feed. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until LAST LF/FF is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 



GEK-99044 



5-69 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



LAST LF/FF 



Enable< 



2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the LAST 
LF/FF options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



Supp CCode 



Coax Com pat 
Supp CCode 



Supp CCode 



Disable< 



This menu option is used to enable/ disable a Supp CCode (Suppress 
Host Control Codes) option. When enabled, this will suppress control 
codes generated by the IBM host. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Supp CCode is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Supp 
CCode options. 

3. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



vcs 



Coax Compat 



VCS 



VCS 



3268/42 14< 



This menu option is used to select a VCS option. This option will 
allow either emulation of a 3287 or 3268/4214 printer. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 

1. While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until VCS is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the VCS 
options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



5-70 



GEK-99044 



Comm 



Coax Com pat 



Comm 



Comm 



QUERY/EAB< 



This menu option is used to select a Comm option. The Comm option 
enables/ disables the Extended Attribute Buffer (EAB) and 
enables/ disables the Query Reply. When set to EAB, EAB is enabled, 
but not Query Reply. When set to QUERY/ EAB, EAB and Query 
Reply are both enabled. In the Disabled state, neither EAB nor Query 
Reply is enabled. 

Use the following procedures to enable/ disable a setting: 



1. 



2. 



While in the Coax Compat menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbuttons until Comm is displayed in the lower 
right corner of the display. 



Press the 
options. 



T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the Comm 



Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed. Press the Select pushbutton to enable 
or disable an option. The < symbol will immediately follow an 
enabled option. 



GEK-99044 



5-71 



Chapter 5 Using the Set Up Menu 



CHAPTER 6. USING THE MAINTENANCE MENU 

The activities performed under this menu include resetting the 
printer to defaults, alignment, head service, power on time and print 
time settings, upgrade software functions, and ribbon monitor 
functions. 



Main Menu 

Maintenance 



While in Local, press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to enter 
the Main Menu. Press the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbutton until Maintenance menu is displayed in the bottom right 
corner of the LCD. Main Menu will be displayed in the upper left 
corner of the LCD. 

To move up or down a level of menu options, press the ▲ (up) or T 
(down) menu browse pushbuttons. To move laterally among options 
on the same level, use the < (left) or ► (right) menu browse 
pushbuttons. 

Currently selected menu options are displayed in the LCD with a < 
symbol, which follows immediately to the right of the menu option. 
Some menu options are toggle options and reflect an enabled or 
disabled condition. Press the Select pushbutton to cause the printer 
to perform this operation. 

Press the Clear pushbutton to return to the upper level menu or to 
Local when in a first-level menu. 



RESET TO DEFLTS 



Maintenance 
Reset to Deflts 



Reset to Deflts 



USA 



This menu is used to reset the printer to factory defaults or re- 
initializing certain groups of printer settings from the control panel. 

Note 

Before proceeding with resetting the printer to previous defaults, 

have a current printout of current settings. This will provide a 

record of settings, which may need to be restored. See the 

"Show" option in Chapter 4 Using the Operator Menu for 

additional information. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the Maintenance menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Reset to Deflts is displayed in the 
lower line of the LCD. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the reset 
to defaults options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton to select 
either USA or International. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access either 
USA or International reset options. 



GEK-99044 



6-1 



Chapter 6. Using the Maintenance Menu 



Note 

The All Interfaces option will reset all interface settings to the 

factory default settings. The All Formats will reset all previously 

saved formats to factory defaults. The All Emulations will reset all 

emulation settings to factory default settings. The Complete 

option will reset all interface, all formats and all emulations 

settings to factory default settings. 

5. Press the Select pushbutton again to reset the printer to factory 
defaults. The printer momentarily displays STARTUP in the LCD 
and will complete a power-up sequence. After completion of a 
power-up sequence, printer returns to Online status. 

6. If the printer was operating before initialization, it may need to be 
reconfigured for the specific task at hand. After achieving proper 
configuration, print a set of status reports and save for future 
reference. 



ALIGNMENT 



Maintenance 



Alignment 



This menu and its sub-menus are used to make adjustments for 
printing issues. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the Maintenance menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Alignment is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select or T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access 
the Alignment options. 

The following describes the options available: 



Patterns 



Alignment 



This menu is used to print the patterns used for adjustments. There 
are six available patterns. Signature will print a small sample of each 
of the other five patterns. The Amplitude Pattern is used to adjust the 
amplitude. The Horizontal Timing, Vertical, Timing and Checkerboard 
Patterns are verification patterns. The Inter-module Gap Pattern is 
used to verify print head mounting. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 



Patterns 



Patterns 



Signature 



Signature 

CLEAR to Stop 



1. While in the Alignment menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until Patterns is displayed in the lower right 
corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select or T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access 
the Patterns options. 

'3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired pattern option is displayed. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to select a pattern to print. CLR to 
Stop will be displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



6-2 



GEK-99044 



5. Press the Clear pushbutton to stop printing the pattern. Press the 
On Line pushbutton to return the printer to the Local menu 
status or press the Clear pushbutton to move backwards up a 
level. 



h£M»l Ho: S3 30 

tpr-l+l »e, j. 

D*t»j . 



■**p * 1 ti*di- f-*i t*hii 1 4i^ 1 1 1 



ft-i ■ .* r . 



Hor1ror»t*l T"1»1h£ F-it*i-n CYm nation Pitt»FPil 

Mill I I llll I I I IIMII I I llll I 

i ■ 1 1 1 1 1 mi 1 1 1 iiiii 1 1 1 mi i 
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

IIIII I Mill I I IIIII I I I IIIII | 

V*r*Llcjl Tiding Pattern rVH-lf IC*«I«« Fat-Carnl 

IIIII 
IIIII 
INN 
IIIII 



I I I I M I t I I I I I I I I I I N I I 
I II I J J | • I I I J I I I j I I I I I I | 

I I I I I I I I I I I II I I I I I I I I I 
I I M I I I I I I I i I I I I I | | | I | 



§ § 

liHMi 
[1 

!; ■! ! 
ASF 



■-h*-rk-Prl-,.i*r,J P*t -t*r--i I Vwi-i-P ick-L 




SIGNATURE PATTERN SAMPLE 



AdjustAmplitude 



This menu is used to adjust the amplitude of the printer. The goal of 
the amplitude adjustment is to bring the six lines the printer is 
printing into perfectly spaced vertical lines. The example following the 
procedures shows a sample amplitude pattern and three blowups of 
pattern samples. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 



Alignment 

AdjustAmplitude 



AdjustAmplitude 



Pattern 



1. While in the Alignment menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu 
browse pushbutton until AdjustAmplitude is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the window. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton, or the □ (down) menu browse 
pushbutton, to access the AdjustAmplitude options. 

3. Press the □ (left) or □ (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
Pattern is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to print the pattern to adjust the 
amplitude. 



GEK-99044 



6-3 



Chapter 6. Using the Maintenance Menu 



AdjustAmplitude 

Save Amplitude 



5. Use the □ (left) or □ (right) menu browse pushbuttons to adjust 
the amplitude while the pattern is printing. 

6. Press the Clear pushbutton to stop printing the pattern. 

7. Press the □ (left) or □ (right) pushbutton until Save Amplitude is 
displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

8. Press the Select pushbutton to save the amplitude adjustment. 




SAMPLE OF AMPLITUDE PATTERN 



PERFECT 
ALIGNMENT 



HEADSERVICE 



Maintenance 

HeadService 



This menu is used to check the amount of usage for the individual 
print heads and to reset the print head counters. The printer keeps 
track of how many times each print head is fired during printing and 
displays this information on a graph. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the Maintenance menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until HeadService is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select or □ (down) menu browse pushbutton to access 
the HeadService options. 

The following describes the options available: 



Dot Counts 



This menu is used to reset the print head counters. The counters for 
the print heads can be reset to zero. This procedure is normally used 
after the installation of a new print head. Resetting this counter 
arbitrarily is not recommended. 

Note 

Make sure the correct print head number is displayed before 

clearing the counter. Once a counter is reset to zero, it cannot 

be set back to its original count. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



6-4 



GEK-99044 



HeadService 

Dot Counts 



Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the HeadService menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Dot Counts is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 



Select to Reset 

XX:nnnnnnnnn 



2. Press the Select pushbutton to access the Dot Counts option. The 
individual print head number will be displayed followed by the 
number of times the individual print head has been fired. In the 
example to the left, XX represents the print head number and 
nnnnnnnnn represents a number. Use the □ (left) or □ (right) 
menu browse pushbutton to locate the desired print head 
counter. 

3. Press the Select pushbutton to reset the count. 

Note 

Repeat this section as often as necessary to reset a print head 

counter. 



Print Chart 



HeadService 

Print Chart 



Print Chart 

CLEAR to Stop 



This menu is used to print a graph of the number of times individual 
print heads have been fired. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

1. While in the HeadService menu, press the □ (left) or □ (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Print Chart is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to print the print chart. CLR to Stop 
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 




PRINT CHART SAMPLE 



GEK-99044 



6-5 



Chapter 6. Using the Maintenance Menu 



Actuator Status 



HeadService 

Actuator Status 



Actuators Failed 
None 



This menu is used to identify an actuator failure. 
Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the HeadService menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Actuator Status is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to display the failed actuator. If no 
actuator has failed, the word None will be displayed in the lower 
left corner of the LCD. 



POWER ON TIME 



Maintenance 

Power on Time 



Power on Time 

HHHHH:MM:SS 



This menu is used to display the total elapsed time that the printer 
has had power applied to it. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the Maintenance menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Power On Time is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to display the Power On Time. In the 

example to the left, HHHHH represents hours, MM represents 
minutes, and SS represents seconds. 

3. Press the Clear pushbutton to return to the previous display. 



PRINT TIME 



Maintenance 

Print Time 



Print Time 

HHHHH:MM:SS 



This menu is used to display the total time the shuttle motor has 
run. 

Use the following procedure to select this option: 

1. While in the Maintenance menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Power Time is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton to display the Power Time. In the 

example to the left, HHHHH represents hours, MM represents 
minutes, and SS represents seconds. 

3. Press the Clear pushbutton to return to the previous display. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



6-6 



GEK-99044 



UPGRADE FLASH 



Maintenance 

Upgrade Flash 



This menu is used to place the printer in a data receiving status for 
upgrading the printer with a software upgrade. See Appendix F for 
complete upgrade installation instructions. 

Use the following procedures to select this option: 

Note 

Make sure the printer is connected to the host before 

proceeding. 

1. While in the Maintenance menu, press the A (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Upgrade Flash is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 



Upgrade Status: 
Ready 



2. Press the Select pushbutton to upgrade the printer. Ready will be 
displayed in the lower left corner of the LCD. (See Appendix F for 
the Software Upgrade procedures and additional information.) To 
exit this function without upgrading the software, re-cycle the 
power to the printer. 



RIBBONMONITOR 



This menu is used to monitor the life of the printer ribbon. When this 
option is enabled, the user can monitor the ribbon life and reset the 
ribbon counter using the Operator menu. (See New Ribbon under the 
Operator menu.) 

Use the following procedures to select this option. 



Maintenance 

Ribbon Monitor 



RibbonMonitor 

Disable< 



EOL Limit 



000M 



1. While in the Maintenance menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until RibbonMonitor is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the LCD. 

2. Press the Select pushbutton or the T (down) menu browse 
pushbutton to access the RibbonMonitor options. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until the 
desired option is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. 

4. Press the Select pushbutton to enable an option. The < symbol 
will immediately follow an enabled option. EOL Limit and EOL 
Warning are user set options. 

Use the following procedures to select these options: 

Press the Select pushbutton while EOL Limit or EOL Warning is 

displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. These options are 
user set. Notice the cursor (underline) is now shown under the 
first digit. The horizontal < ► (left or right) menu browse 
pushbuttons to position the cursor (underline) under the digit to 
be changed; the vertical ▲ T (up or down) menu browse 
pushbutton increment/ decrement the selected digit by one. 

Press the Clear pushbutton after all changes are complete and 
the desired value is displayed in the lower right corner of the 
LCD. When the printer is online, the LCD window will display the 
EOL value remaining for monitoring purposes. 



GEK-99044 



6-7 



Chapter 6. Using the Maintenance Menu 



Note 

Repeat this section if further changes are necessary. The valid 

range of values for EOL Limit is between 30 and 120. The valid 

range of values for EOL Warning is between and 29. 

The EOL Limit allows the use to set the End of Life Limit value 
for the Ribbon. Although, the user can set a limit other than the 
EOL recommended for a ribbon, the current EOL types available 

are as follows: 

5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model 50M and 75 M 

5180 (52 and 55 dBa) Cabinet Model 75M and 125M 

The EOL Warning allows the user to set the End Of Life Warning 

value for the ribbon. This warning does not cause a fault. It is a 

monitoring function only. 



5000 Series User's Manual 6-8 GEK-99044 



CHAPTER 7. OPERATOR CARE AND MAINTENANCE 
INTRODUCTION 

These shuttle matrix printers are designed so that preventive 
maintenance is not required. There are no lubrication requirements; 
therefore, operator maintenance is minimal. 

OPERATOR CLEANING PROCEDURES 
5050/5100 (50, 55 OR 60 DBA) CABINET MODEL 

Clean the printer as necessary. The area where the printer is located, 
the amount of usage, and the type of paper used all affect how often 
cleaning is required. 

1 . Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power cord from the 
AC source. 

2. Turn the print gap wheel to the LOAD position and remove the 
paper. 

3. Turn the ribbon locking lever to the LOAD position and remove 
the ribbon cartridge. 

4. Rotate the control panel to the open position. 

5. Starting with the center thumbscrew, loosen the three 
thumbscrews and remove the ribbon deck. See Figure 7- 1 . 



RIBBON 
SHIELD 




THREE 
THUMBSCREWS 



FIGURE 7-1 THE RIBBON DECK 
5050/5100 (50, 55 OR 60 dBa) CABINET MODEL 

Caution 

Use extreme care while cleaning around the ribbon shield area. 
The shield is constructed of thin metal and the edges are sharp. 



GEK-99044 



7-1 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



6. Vacuum the print head area using a soft bristle brush to dislodge 
paper debris. Wipe away any accumulation of dust from the 
ribbon shield and striker bar area. 

7. Blow dust out of, or away from, the paper jam sensor on the 
upper left tractor. 

8. Blow dust out off or away from, the paper out sensor on the lower 
left tractor. 

9. Blow dust out of, or away from, the ribbon weld sensor located on 
the left of the print heads. 

10. Vacuum any paper debris that has accumulated inside the paper 
storage area. 

1 1 . Vacuum both the top and bottom side of the ribbon deck. Make 
sure the ribbon motion sensor is clean. 

12. Reinstall the ribbon deck making sure all three thumbscrews are 
tightened. 

13. Inspect the ribbon fabric for wear before reinstalling the ribbon 
cartridge. 

14. Clean the outside surfaces of the printer with a clean damp cloth. 
Dampen the cloth with water. Do not use cleaning solutions. 
Always dry the outside cabinet surfaces with a clean dry cloth. 

15. Reconnect the power cord and apply power to the printer for 
operation. 



OPERATOR CLEANING PROCEDURES 
5180 (52 OR 55 DBA) CABINET MODEL 



Clean the printer as necessary. The area where the printer is located, 
the amount of usage, and the type of paper used all affect how often 
cleaning is required. 

Use the following procedures to clean the printer: 

1 . Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power cable from 
the AC source. 

Warning 

Use extreme care while cleaning around the smudge shield area. 
The shield is constructed of thin metal and the edges are sharp. 

2. Turn the print gap adjust knob to the Load position, remove the 
ribbon cartridge, and wipe away any accumulation of dust from 
the smudge shield and striker bar area. 

3. With a soft brush and vacuum, remove any paper dust that has 
accumulated inside the printer. Most dust tends to accumulate in 
the striker bar area and the paper supply compartment. 

4. Reinstall or replace (if print legibility is not acceptable) the ribbon 
cartridge. 



5000 Series User's Manual 7 ~ 2 GEK-99044 



5. Clean the outside surfaces of the printer with a clean cloth and 
water. Do not use cleaning solutions. Always dry the outside 
cabinet surfaces with a clean dry cloth. 

Warning 

Do not operate the printer with the air filters removed. 

6. Check the air filters on each side of the printer for blockage. If 
needed, remove the filter by sliding the grille up and pulling it out 
at the top. Vacuum and/or replace the filters. 

7. Reconnect the power cable and apply power to the printer for 
operation. 



OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING 



Many of the operating faults that can occur are operator-correctable. 
They are often related to an incorrect setup, wrong adjustment, or the 
need to replenish consumables. 

Initializing the Printer - Newly installed parts or options, power 
fluctuations, static buildup, or errant electrical signals may cause the 
printer electronics to lock up. Initializing the printer will clear this 
problem as long as no damage has been done. (See "Chapter 2 - 
Initializing the Printer"). 

Use the initialization procedure when: 

■ Inputs to the control panel are ignored or misinterpreted. 

■ The printer performs unexplained actions or ignores commands. 

■ The printer misinterprets valid commands from the host. 

The remainder of this chapter is divided into the following sections 
and contains information as a help guide through possible problems. 

TABLE 7-1 - Soft Fault Displays, lists display messages that may 

appear that do not stop the printer. 

TABLE 7-2 - Miscellaneous Non-Fault Messages 

TABLE 7-3 -Hard Fault Displays, lists display messages that may 

appear when printing has stopped unexpectedly. It also lists the 

probable cause and/ or the action needed to clear the fault. 

TABLE 7-4 - Electrical Problems, as a guides when the display, 

pushbuttons, or an incorrect data printout is the problem. 

TABLE 7-5 - Mechanical Problems, addresses problems with paper 

feeding, print quality, and incorrect adjustments. 

TABLE 7-6 - Diagnostic Fault Codes, shows and explains the faults 

that may be detected during self-test diagnostics. 

TABLE 7-7 - Serial Interface Errors 

Print Head Actuator Replacement - Step-by-step replacement 

instructions and information that may keep the printer online if a 

replacement print head is not immediately available. 



GEK-99044 7-3 Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



Soft Faults 



When a soft fault occurs, printing stops, and operator intervention is 
required. 

Some change in the data being sent to the printer may be required 
(See Programmer's Manual). 

If a wire driver or print head actuator fails, (see the first two displays 
in Table 7-1), printing may continue without damage to the printer 
(see the section on print head replacement). 

Press the CLEAR pushbutton to clear the display. 

Either Online or Local will be displayed in upper left corner of the 
display window. The following fault messages will be displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display window: 



5000 Series User's Manual 7-4 GEK-99044 



TABLE 7-1 
Soft Fault Displays 



DISPLAY 


MEANING 


CORRECTIVE ACTION 


Change Ribbon 


The Ribbon monitor feature has 
detected the specified number of 
dots has been printed for the 
current ribbon. 


Press the CLEAR pushbutton to 
ignore this warning and 
continue printing or replace the 
current ribbon. Reset the ribbon 
count through the operator 
menu, if Ribbon Monitor is 
enabled. 


Service Time 


Service time was set to zero or the 
timer has failed. 


Press the Clear pushbutton to 
clear the fault. 


Paper Almost Out 


Low paper print mode. 


Press the Clear pushbutton to 
enter Low Paper printing mode 
or replace the paper supply. 


VFU Missing TOF 


Missing TOF in the VFU load 
sequence. 


Press the Clear pushbutton to 
clear the fault. Verify data being 
sent to the printer by the host 
system. 


VFU PI Lead 


Paper Instruction lead: The menu 
option for PI lead selection is set 
incorrectly. 


Press the Clear pushbutton to 
clear the fault. Change the PI 
Lead setting using the set up 
menu options. 


Invalid VFU Seq 


There is an invalid character(s) in 
the VFU load sequence. 


Press the Clear pushbutton to 
clear the fault. Verify data being 
sent to the printer by the host 
system. 


VFU Tbl Too Long 


The VFU table length has been 
exceeded. 


Press the Clear pushbutton to 
clear the fault. Verify data being 
sent to the printer by the host 
system. 


Paper Almost Out 


A low paper condition exists. 


Press the CLEAR pushbutton to 
proceed to low paper printing. 
See "Low Paper Printing" in 
Chapter 3. 


Paper Out 


Paper supply is depleted. 


Load paper and set top of form. 
The paper out sensor is reset 
when paper is inserted in the 
lower tractors and the CLEAR 
pushbutton is pressed. 


Paper Jam 


No paper movement has been 
sensed by the paper motion 
sensor. 


Check for paper jam and clear 
using the following procedure: 

1 . Turn the print gap wheel to 
the LOAD position and 
physically clear the paper 
jam. 

2. Reload paper and readjust 
right side tractors, paper 
tension and gap. 

3. Press the CLEAR 
pushbutton to clear display 

Clean the paper motion sensor 
located on the upper left tractor. 



GEK-99044 



7-5 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



TABLE 7-1 
Soft Fault Displays (Continued) 



No Ribbon 


Ribbon cartridge is missing, 
installed incorrectly, or damaged. 


Install Ribbon. See "Installing 
Ribbon" in Chapter 2. 


Ribbon Jam 


Ribbon has stopped moving. 


1. Remove the ribbon cartridge. 

2. Clean the ribbon motion 
sensor. 

3. Inspect and reinstall the 
ribbon cartridge. 

Press the CLEAR pushbutton to 
clear the fault. 


Ribbon Weld 


A specified amount of time has 
passed without detecting the 
ribbon weld passing. The ribbon 
may be jammed or broken. 


Check the ribbon. If necessary, 
replace ribbon. See " Replacing 
Ribbon" in Chapter 2. 


Ribbon Weld Pass 


The ribbon weld is passing by the 
actuators while the printer is 
suspended. 


Press the Clear pushbutton to 
clear the fault. 


Striker Bar Open 


Print gap wheel turned to the 
OPEN position. 


Adjust for proper paper gap. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



7-6 



GEK-99044 



Miscellaneous Non-Fault Messages 



The following displays indicate printer status: 

Either Online or Local will be displayed in upper left corner of the 
display window. The following fault messages will be displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display window: 

Table 7-2 
Miscellaneous Non-Fault Messages 



DISPLAY 


MEANING 


Ready 


The serial interface CB lead is true. 


Standby 
Mode 


Printer deselected by host via received DC3. 


Tearoff 


Paper is in position for tear off at rear paper exit. 


TopTearoff 


Paper is in position for tear off at top paper exit. 
See "Tearoff in Chaper 3 for additional 
information. 



GEK-99044 



7-7 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



Hard Faults 



When a hard fault occurs, the printer will be rendered inoperative. 
Operator intervention may correct the fault, however service may be 
required. Correct the condition causing the fault, if possible and 
press the CLEAR pushbutton to restore printer operation. 



5000 Series User's Manual 7 "8 GEK-99044 



TABLE 7-3 
Hard Fault Displays 



DISPLAY 


MEANING 




Driver Circuit 


All actuators on an entire tier fail. 


Call for Service. 


Shuttle Overload 


Shuttle drive motor is stalled or 
overloaded. 


Check for interference 
caused by a paper jam or 
print gap adjusted too 
tight. If problem 
continues, call for service. 


Low Power 


Power supply has sensed low line 
voltage or is temporarily overloaded 
by continuous high density printing. 


Check for irregular 
voltage from power 
source. If problem 
continues, call for service. 


Image Logic Fail 


No image logic dot request processed 
for 5 seconds. 


Try to clear fault by 
cycling power and 
initializing the printer. If 
problem continues, call 
for service. 


NVRAM Reinit 


NVRAM has been initialized. 


Press CLEAR pushbutton 
to continue. If problem 
continues, call for service. 


No Font 


No printable font found in printer. 


Try to clear fault by 
cycling power and 
initializing. If fault does 
not clear, call for service. 


Bad Wire Driver 


A defective wire driver has been found 
(see Note 1). 


Move or replace actuator 
modules. If problem 
continues, call for service. 


Bad Actuator 


A print head actuator has been found 
(see Note 1). 


Move or replace actuator 
modules. If problem 
continues, call for service. 


LEFT FAN 


The left print head fan in the ribbon 
deck has failed. Call for service. 


Call for service. 


LEFT CENTER 
FAN 


The left center print head fan in the 
ribbon deck has failed. Call for 
service. 


Call for service. 


RIGHT CENTER 
FAN 


The right center print head fan in the 
ribbon deck has failed. Call for 
service. 


Call for service. 


RIGHT FAN 


The right print head fan in the ribbon 
deck has failed. Call for service. 


Call for service. 


REAR FAN 


The rear fan for the logic circuit 
boards has failed. Call for service. 


Call for service. 


VFU Fmt Inactive 


A VFU load sequence has been 
received and the printer is in "Vertical 
Tab" mode instead of "Emulation 
VFU" mode. 
The sequence will be discarded. 


Press the Clear 
pushbutton to clear the 
fault. The Vertical Format 
mode is selectable from 
the SetUp menu. 



Note 1 : When a defective wire driver or actuator is found, use the Maintenance Menu to find the position of the 
bad actuator, position (1-66 for 1000/1800-lpm or 1-33 for 500-lpm). (See Chapter 6 "Using the Maintenance 
Menu" for additional information.) 



GEK-99044 



7-9 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



Electrical Problems 



Use Table 7-4 when problems are experienced with the display, 
pushbuttons, or data printouts. 

TABLE 7-4 
Electrical Problems 



PROBLEM 


POSSIBLE CAUSE/ CORRECTIVE ACTION 


No indication on the display panel 
when power is turned on. 


■ Make sure that the power cord is 
securely plugged into the printer and 
wall outlet. 

■ Check for power at the wall outlet using 
a known good appliance. 

■ Check the thumbscrews on the ribbon 
deck. 

■ Check the printer for a blown fuse. 


Some pushbuttons are inoperative. 


■ Normal if printer is online. 

■ Offline: Printer may be locked up. Try to 
print a status sheet as future reference 
for printer settings. 

■ Recycle the power to the printer and 
initialize the printer. 


Printer does not respond correctly to 
pushbutton commands. 


■ Invalid configuration may be causing 
printer to lock up. Turn power off for 15 
seconds, and then back on. If problem 
persists, initialize the printer. 


Incorrect or no printout. 


■ Check interface cable connections. 

■ Selected speed (baud rate) may not be 
compatible with host. Reset serial 
interface data rate. 

■ Parity selected may not be compatible 
with host. Reset serial interface parity 
type. 

■ Interface settings may not be compatible 
with host. Recheck settings and 
compare to host protocol settings. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



7-10 



GEK-99044 



Mechanical Problems 



Use Table 7-5 when problems are experienced with paper feeding and 
print quality. 

TABLE 7-5 
Mechanical Problems 



PROBLEM 


POSSIBLE CAUSE/ CORRECTIVE ACTION 


Paper does not feed properly. 


■ Paper supply in lower enclosure not aligned 
properly. 

■ Paper snagging on box. Cut top of box off. 

■ Paper not loaded properly. Reload paper and 
check tractors for proper adjustment. 


Paper tearing, paper "walking" out of 
tractors, elongation of paper pin holes. 


■ Excessive tension on paper. 

■ Readjust paper tension lever, readjust print gap 
wheel, check right side upper and lower tractors 
for correct lateral paper tension. 


Paper jammed. 


■ Paper jams are most often caused by incorrect 
paper tension (see above) or misaligned tractors 
or paper. 

1 . Turn the print gap wheel to the LOAD position 
and physically clear paper jam. 

2. Reload paper, readjust right side tractors, paper 
tension, and gap. 

3. Press CLEAR pushbutton to print buffered data 
and to clear display. 


Light printing. 


■ Ribbon worn. Install a new ribbon. 

■ Paper gap too large. Turn print gap wheel for a 
smaller gap. 


Ribbon droops on one side during 
printing or outer columns of print 
missing. 


■ Ribbon cartridge improperly installed. Check 
installation by repeating installation procedure. 

■ Print heads too close to paper. Adjust paper gap 
setting for thicker paper. 


Weak or absent printing in some 
columns, light or missing dots in 
adjacent columns, poor print quality in 
a narrow zone of the print area. Bad 
Actuator or Driver Circuit may be 
displayed. 


■ Check for loose cable connection on print head 
actuators. 

■ Bad Actuator indicates that an actuator or the 
driver circuit controlling that actuator has failed 
the printer's test of the circuit. Try replacing the 
actuator. 

■ Driver Circuit is displayed when the printer's self 
test determines that ALL of the actuators or wire 
drivers are defective. 

■ When either of these occur, call for service. 
Continue to use printer if light or missing dots 
can be tolerated temporarily. 



GEK-99044 



7-11 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



Self-test Error Messages 



Self-test diagnostics are run: 

■ During the power-on sequence. 

■ After initialization by either the control panel keypad. 

■ After printing. 

■ When requested from the host by the ESC Q escape sequence. 
(See Programmer's Manual for information on escape sequences.) 

The following table shows the display message, fault, and error 
message. (The error message is used only when requested by ESC Q - 
See note.) The fault column indicates which circuit board is defective. 

NOTE 

The error message is used only in the ANSI emulation while 
using the serial interface. When an ESC Q escape sequence is 

received, the printer performs a self-test and sends the 

appropriate error message to the host if a fault is found. DCS = 

ESC P and ST = ESC \. See Programmer's Manual for information on 

the ANSI emulation and escape sequences. 

TABLE 7-6 
Diagnostic Fault Codes 



DISPLAY 


FAULT 


CORRECTIVE ACTION 


Self Test 


Self-test in progress. 


None. 


TTMI error 


Invalid response from TTMI board. 


Call for service. 


TTMI noresp 


No response from TTMI board. 


Call for service. 


TTMI checksum 


TTMI board ROM checksum failure. 


Call for service 


Shuttle Error 


Shuttle cannot stabilize. 


Check for paper jam or print gap 
adjustment. If either condition 
does not exist, call for service. 


Loading 

Please Wait 


Self-test completed with no errors 
found, printer software is loading. 


None. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



7-12 



GEK-99044 



SERIAL INTERFACE ERRORS 



If the host does not stop sending data when the printer reports busy, 
the input buffer will eventually fill to capacity. Any additional data 
sent by the host will be discarded and an error condition will exist. 
This error may be reported to the operator via GenPtrOpts (Group 1) 
strap 16. See "GenPtrOpts" in Chapter 3 and Table 3 in Appendix G 
for additional information. 

Parity, Framing and UART overrun characters will be replaced in the 
data stream with the "*" character. 



Strap 16 


Type of Error 


Display/ Print 
Message 


Action 
performed 


Disabled 


Parity Error 


Parity Error 


Replace character 
with "*" 


Disabled 


Framing Error 


Framing Error 


Replace character 
with "*" 


Disabled 


UART Overflow Error 


UART Overflow 


Replace character 
with "*" 


Disabled 


Buffer Overflow Error 


Buffer 
Overflow 


Lost data after 
end of Buffer 



When Strap 16 is enabled, the action performed is the same as Strap 
16 disabled, but a message is displayed and printed. The printer is 
placed in an offline condition. Press the CLEAR pushbutton to 
continue. 



PRINT HEAD REPLACEMENT 

5050/5100 (50, 55 OR 60 DBA) CABINET MODEL 

The 33 print heads in this printer are identical. If a replacement print 
head is temporarily unavailable, rearrange the heads so that the 
defective one is located in an area that is least likely to be used. 
Relocating the defective head to the far right end of the shuttle would 
still allow a full 12.8-inch line (128 characters at 10 cpi) to be printed 
starting at the left. 



HANDLE 
500-LPM PRINT HEAD 





BARRELS 



1000-LPM PRINT HEAD 



FIGURE 7-2 PRINT HEADS 

Print heads for the 500-lpm printers have one actuator. See Figure 7- 
2. Print heads for the 1000-lpm printer have two actuators. 



GEK-99044 



7-13 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



The actuators for the 500-lpm and 1000-lpm models are physically 
marked to distinguish them from lower speed model actuators. The 
brazed block on the 500-lpm and 1000-lpm model has a black 
connector housing. See Figure 7-3. 




FIGURE 7-3 
BLACK BRAZED BLOCK (1000-LPM) 

The handle on the actuator is used to lift the print head from the 
printer. During installation, press down and to the right on the 
barrels of the print head to position it properly. 

The section starting below covers the replacement of the print heads. 
See Appendix D for information on ordering print head replacement 
kits. 

Note 

Do not operate the printer with a print head removed. All 33 

heads must be in place with their connectors secured to 

maintain shuttle balance. 

Replacement Procedure 

To remove and replace a print head, complete the following steps: 

1 . Turn the printer power off and disconnect the power cord from 
the AC source. 

2. Open the top cover and set the print gap wheel to the LOAD 
position. 

3. Remove the ribbon cartridge. 

4. Tilt the control panel up and towards the front of the printer. 

5. Starting with the middle one, unscrew the three captive 
thumbscrews and remove the ribbon deck. 

Note 

If the printer has been printing for an extended time, allow it to 

cool for five minutes. 



5000 Series User's Manual 7-14 GEK-99044 



6. Remove the Allen wrench from the foam padding. See Figure 7-4. 

ACTUATOR NUMBERS 

RIBBON SHIELD 




FIGURE 7-4 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE (1 OF 3) 

7. Unscrew the two screws securing the print head cable cover for 
the print head to be removed. See Figure 7-4. Unscrew the screws 
until their ends are flush with the end of the cover. 

Note 

On 500-lpm printers, the cable covers are attached in pairs. 
Three screws must be loosened to remove the covers. 

When removing print heads 6, 17, and 28 on a 1000-lpm printer, 

two cable covers must be removed. Remove covers 1 and 2 for 

print head 6, covers 3 and 4 for print head 17, and covers 5 and 

6 for print head 28. 

8. Remove the cable cover by pulling back on it while wiggling it 
from side to side. After it is disconnected, lift up on the back of 
the cover to clear the screws. 



GEK-99044 



7-15 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



9. Each print head number is shown in a large circle on the label 
underneath the print heads. See Figure 7-4. Lay the Allen wrench 
down between the dotted lines over the number of the head to be 
removed. The print head screw underneath the head is difficult to 
see; however, it can be felt it with the wrench. See Figure 7-5. 

10. Loosen the screw 1/2 turn. 

1 1 . Grasp the print head by the handle and lift it out of the printer. 
See Figure 7-5. 



s\ 




LIFT STRAIGHT UP 




PRINT HEAD NUMBERS 
FIGURE 7-5 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE (2 OF 3) 



5000 Series User's Manual 



7-16 



GEK-99044 



12. Place the new print head over the print head screw. Press down 
and to the right on the barrels of the print head and tighten the 
screw. See Figure 7-6. 

Note 

If there is not enough or too much clearance for the new print 

head, loosen the print head screws on all of the heads to the left 

of the one being replaced. When the new print head is in place, 

tighten all print head screws starting with the new one and 

working towards the left side of the printer. Keep each print 

head snug against the print head immediately to the right. 



D©©(5 



PRESS DOWN AND TO THE 
RIGHT ON BOTH BARRELS 




FIGURE 7-6 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE (3 OF 3) 

13. Push the cable cover/ connector over the connecting pins on the 
print heads. Wiggle the cover from side to side while pushing the 
connector onto the pins. When in place, press down on the end of 
the cover while tightening the cover screws. 

14. Install the ribbon deck and a ribbon cartridge. Make sure the 
thumbscrews are tight on the ribbon deck. 

15. Apply power and run the printer again to verify correct operation. 



GEK-99044 



7-17 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



PRINT HEAD REPLACEMENT 

5180 (52 OR 55 DBA) CABINET MODEL 



The six print actuator modules are identical. If a replacement module 
is temporarily unavailable, rearrange the modules so that the 
defective one is located in an area that is least likely to be used. 
Relocating the defective module to the far right end of the shuttle 
would still allow a full 1 1-inch line (110 characters at 10 cpi) to be 
printed starting at the left. 






- 2.3n, — |— 2.art —I— 2.a n . — j— Zfln. 
(5.6cm> ! (5.6cm) | (5.6cm) (5,6cm) 



■ 2.Hn. 
(5.6cfn) 



T 



(5-ton) 



NUMIIItl 
LEfT 



PRINT UQDULJ 
NUMHEP 2 



rc 



HUM1IK3 



n 



TAINT HDDUU 



*h|Nt*9«Wl 



f I U 1 [ 



^T 



PRINT UODUIE 

hKIM#|H-i 

-l-Z i - 



See Appendix D for information on ordering print actuator modules. 

Note 

Do not operate the printer with a print module removed. All six 
modules must be in place to maintain shuttle balance. 

Any of the six print modules may be removed and replaced 

without special tools or equipment. A coin or screwdriver may be 

used to loosen a single screw on each module, but a screwdriver 

is preferred to avoid dropping a coin into the printer. 

To remove and replace a print module, complete the following steps: 

1 . Turn the printer power off and disconnect the power cable from 
the AC source. 

2. Open the top access door and set the print gap adjust knob to the 
Load position (fully clockwise.) 

3. Remove the ribbon cartridge. 

4. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews (See Figure 7-7) and tilt the 
print module access panel up out of the way. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



7-18 



GEK-99044 



5. Remove the section of air duct nearest you by pulling it back, and 
then up. The duct snaps on and off. See Figure 7-7. 



REMOVE THIS 

PORTION OF 

AIR DUCT 




CAPTIVE 
THUMBSCREW 



PRINT MODULE 
ACCESS PANEL 

FIGURE 7-7 



CAPTIVE 
THUMBSCREW 



Note 

Print modules must be removed in order from left to right, and 

replaced in reverse order. For Example, to remove the number 3 

module, remove the left first, number 2 module next, and then 

the third module. 

When reassembling, the rightmost module that was removed 

must be installed first, followed by the next module, and so on, 

until the left module is in place. 




FIGURE 7-8 
REMOVING PRINT HEAD CABLES 

6. Disconnect the two flat ribbon cables from the modules to be 
removed. See Figure 7-8. 



GEK-99044 



7-19 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



Caution 

Do not attempt to completely unscrew the thumbscrew securing 
the print module. Damage to the retaining clips will result. 

7. Use a screwdriver to loosen the knurled-head screw of the 
modules to be removed. 

8. Rotate each module to be removed, in turn back towards the front 
of the printer and lift to remove. See Figures 7-10 and 7-11. 




FIGURE 7-9 
REMOVING FIRST PRINT MODULE 




FIGURE 7-10 
REMOVING NUMBER 6 PRINT MODULE 

Note 

Before reinstalling the print actuator modules, be sure the 

module mounting surface and wire guides are free of foreign 

matter (ribbon and paper dust.) 

9. Replace the modules in reverse order of removal. Holding the 
module tilted back slightly, place it on the mounting surface and 
rotate it forward. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



7-20 



GEK-99044 



10. Slide each module towards the right as far as it will go. Hold it 
towards the right until the screw is tightened to prevent print 
gaps between modules. 

1 1 . Use a screwdriver to tighten the screw. 

12. Reconnect the ribbon cables to the modules. 

13. Replace the portion of air duct removed earlier. 

14. Lower the print module access panel into position and tighten the 
two thumbscrews. 

Note 

The thumbscrews must be threaded properly and tight to actuate 
the AC interlock switch. 

15. Install the ribbon. 

16. Turn the print gap adjust knob to the desired setting (normally 1 
for single-part forms) and close the top cover. 

17. Reconnect the power cable to the AC source and turn the power 
switch to the on position. 



Resetting Print Head Counters 



Main 



Maintenance 



Maintenance 

HeadService 



HeadService 

Dot Counts 



The printer keeps track of how many times each print head is fired 
during printing and displays this information on a graph. 

Counters should be reset only when a new print head has been 
installed. 

Note 

Make sure the correct print head number is displayed before 

clearing the counter. Once a counter is reset to zero, it can not 

be set back to its original count. 

Use the following procedure to reset the counters: 

1. Press the On Line pushbutton to place printer offline or in local 
mode. 

2. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
menus. 

3. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until 
Maintenance is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 

4. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
Maintenance menu options. HeadService will be displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display window. 

5. Press the T (down) menu browse pushbutton to access the 
HeadService options. 

6. Press the A (left) or ► (right) menu browse pushbutton until Dot 
Counts is displayed in the lower right corner of the display 
window. 



GEK-99044 



7-21 



Chapter 7 Operator Care and Maintenance 



Select to Reset 

XX:nnnnnnnnn 



Press the Select pushbutton to access the Dot Counts option. The 
individual print head number will be displayed followed by the 
number of times the individual print head has been fired. In the 
example to the left, XX represents the print head number and 
nnnnnnnnn represents a number. Use the ^ (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton to locate the desired print head 
counter. 

Press the Select pushbutton to reset the count. Repeat this step 
as often as necessary to reset a print head counter. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



7-22 



GEK-99044 



APPENDIX A UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS 



UNPACKING (5180 52 dBa MODEL) 

1 . Cut only the two shipping straps that hold the shipping package 
to the pallet. See Figure A-l. 

2. Carefully slide the shipping package and its contents off of the 
pallet. Move the pallet from the unpacking area. 

3. Now cut the two remaining shipping straps that surround the 
shipping package. See Figure A-2. 

4. Lift the top off the shipping package. 



STEP 1 




STEP 2 




STEP 4 



STEP 3 



FIGURE A-l 



FIGURE A-2 



GEK-99044 



A-1 



Appendix A Unpacking Instructions 



5. Remove the packing material from the top of the printer. See 
Figure A-3. 

6. Lift out the single panel of the shipping package sleeve. See 
Figure A-3. 

7. Now remove the remaining 3-sided package sleeve and the 
packing material. See Figure A-3. 



STEP 5 



STEP 7 



STEP 6 




FIGURE A-3 

8. Cut the front and back corners of both sides of the shipping 
package base so that the cardboard will lay flat. See Figure A-4. 

9. Cut the plastic bag free from the shipping blocks on each side 
(taking care to not scratch or cut the printer) and remove from 
the printer. 

10. Tilt the printer slightly from the side where the cardboard was cut 
and kick the packing block (see figure A-4) out from under the 
printer. Carefully lower the printer. Repeat to remove the packing 
block from the opposite side. 




STEP 9 



STEP 8 



FIGURE A-4 

11. Roll the printer off the base of the shipping package. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



A-2 



GEK-99044 



SHIPPING 
BRACKET 



12. Open the top cover of printer and remove the sheet of packing 
material covering the control panel. 

13. Next, remove the foam packing block from between the paper 
guides by cutting the plastic tie. 

14. To maintain stability in the printer during shipping two brackets 
are used to attach the print mechanism to the frame. THESE 
MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE THE PRINTER IS PUT INTO 
OPERATION! Please study Figure A-5 (below) and follow the steps 
listed below to remove the brackets. An Allen wrench is provided 
in the manual kit for the removal of the screws. 

15. Open the front cabinet door. The shipping brackets are located on 
the right and left sides of the cabinet. Three screws attach each 
bracket - one on the top which it is attached to the print 
mechanism and two on the bottom, which are attached to the 
cabinet frame. 

16. Remove the screw holding the bracket to the print mechanism. 

17. Remove the two screws on the bottom of the shipping bracket. 

Note 

The brackets and screws, as well as the Allen wrench can be 
reused if the printer is shipped to a new location at a future 

date. 




FIGURE A-5 



GEK-99044 



A-3 



Appendix A Unpacking Instructions 



Unpacking (5050/5100 55 DbA Model) 

1. Cut the shipping straps. See Figure A-6. 

2. Lift the top off the shipping package. See Figure A-6. 



STEP 1 




STEP 2 



FIGURE A-6 

3. Remove any items stored inside the shipping package. See Figure 
A-7 

4. Remove the tray. See Figure A-7. 

5. Remove the two pieces of packing material from the top of the 
printer. See Figure A-7. 

6. Lift out the front wall of the shipping sleeve. See Figure A-7. 



STEP 3 AND 4 



STEP 5 



STEP 6 




FIGURE A-7 



5000 Series User's Manual 



A-4 



GEK-99044 



7. Remove the packing material and box containing the paper 
handling system from in front of the printer. See Figure A-8. 

8. Remove the remaining portion of the shipping package sleeve. See 
Figure A-8. 



STEP 7 




STEP 8 



FIGURE A-8 

9. Remove the ribbon cartridge box and the packing material from 
the rear of the printer. See Figure A-9. 

CAUTION 

The printer is top heavy. Use two people for the next four steps. 

10. Using two people, carefully slide the printer, in the shipping 
package base, off the pallet. This is easiest done with one person 
on one side of the printer and the other person on the opposite 
side. Place a foot on the pallet to prevent it from moving, and slide 
the printer forward off the pallet. 



STEP 9 




PLACE FOOT HERE 
DURING STEP 10 



FIGURE A-9 



GEK-99044 



A-5 



Appendix A Unpacking Instructions 



Repacking 



1 1 . Cut the four corners of the shipping package base so that the 
sides will lay flat. See Figure A- 10. 




STEP 11 



FIGURE A- 10 

12. Tilt the printer up slightly on one side and kick the packing block 
out from under the printer. Carefully lower the printer. 

13. Tilt the printer up on the other side and remove the other packing 
block. 

14. Remove the plastic bag from the printer. 

15. Roll the printer off the base of the shipping package. 



If this product needs to be repackaged for shipment to another 
location or for servicing, contact an authorized sales representative 
for a field repacking kit. 



UNPACKING (5180 MODEL) 



Printer unpacking is complete when all boxes and accessories have 
been removed from the lower part of the printer. 

Move the printer to a suitable operating location. See Appendix C for 
considerations on the space and conditions required for normal 
operation. 

Each corner of the printer has a screw-down leveling pad near the 
wheel. Use the pads to level the printer on uneven surfaces or to 
prevent the printer from rolling. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



A-6 



GEK-99044 



Removing the Shipping Blocks and Hardware 

Caution 



Important: Operation of the printer with the shipping hardware 
installed will cause excessive vibration and damage. All three 
shippng blocks and the two striker bar support bolts must be 

removed. 



Note 

Due to production changes, the shipping hardware in the printer 
may vary slightly in type and appearance. 



SHIPPING 
BLOCKS 



STRIKER BAR 
SUPPORT BOLT 




STRIKER BAR 
SUPPORT BOLT 



SHIPPING 
BLOCK BOLTS 



FIGURE A- 11 
SHIPPING HARDWARE 



Use the following procedures to remove the three shipping blocks and 
two striker bar support bolts before using the printer (See Figure A- 
11): 



1. Open the front access door. 



GEK-99044 



A-7 



Appendix A Unpacking Instructions 



2. Remove the three shipping block bolts from the "ceiling" of the 
lower enclosure. See Figure A- 12. One bolt is located near the 
front of the printer and the other two are near the back wall of the 
enclosure. 

To locate the two rear shipping blocks and bolts, enter the lower 
area of the printer far enough to look behind the paper handling 
assembly (lower tractors and paper guides.) 



PAPER 
HANDLING 
ASSEMBLY 



FRONT SHIPPING 
BLOCK BOLT 




REAR SHIPPING BLOCKS 

AND BOLTS UP BEHIND 

PAPER HANDLING ASSEMBLY 

FIGURE A- 12 
SHIPPING BLOCK BOLTS 



4. 
5. 



After removing the bolts, reach up behind the paper handling 
assembly and remove the two rear shipping blocks. Use a 
screwdriver to help slide the blocks loose. The front shipping 
block is removed from inside the top of the printer. 

Open the top access door. 

Unscrew the two print module access panel screws (See Figure 7- 
7 in Chapter 7) and tilt the ribbon shelf up towards the front of 
the printer. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



A-8 



GEK-99044 



6. Remove the front shipping block. If necessary, use a screwdriver 
to slide the blocks free. (See Figure A- 13.) 



REAR SHIPPING BLOCKS 



STRIKER BAR 
SUPPORT 




STRIKER BAR 
SUPPORT 



BOLTS SECURING STRIKER 
BAR DURING SHIPMENT 



FRONT SHIPPING BLOCK 

FIGURE A- 13 
SHIPPING BLOCK LOCATIONS 

7. Remove the two striker bar support bolts. (See Figure A- 13.) 

8. After replacing the print module access panel, make sure the 
access screws are threaded properly and tightened all the way. 
The shelf has an AC power interlock switch that removed power 
when the shelf is raised. 



GEK-99044 



A-9 



Appendix A Unpacking Instructions 



APPENDIX B PAPER SPECIFICATIONS 



The printer is designed to use edge-punched (sprocket-fed) fanfold 
paper. See diagram below, multipart forms should be free of staples 
or stitching and preferably held together with glue or self-crimping 
techniques. They need to be of uniform thickness from side-to-side. 
In the case of special forms and gummed labels, it is best to consult a 
forms supplier for help in selecting the best forms construction and 
to try a sample to ensure satisfactory operation. The chart on the 
next page lists forms that should provide satisfactory performance. 

Paper widths from 3 inches (76.2 mm) to 16.54 inches (420.1 mm) 
and form lengths from 0.3 inch (8.4 mm) to 22 inches (559 mm) can 
be accommodated. Fanfolds between 5.5 and 12 inches (139.7 and 
304.8 mm) apart are recommended. 

Note 

High humidity may cause unsatisfactory paper feeding and 

handling. Low humidity may cause static buildup. Make sure you 

test how well the forms feed under various ambient conditions. 

Some recycled papers have a higher content of dust and debris, 

which may require more frequent cleaning of the printer. 

The most satisfactory performance from the printer can be achieved 
with paper of the recommended weights as shown below. 



RECOMMENDED PAPER WEIGHTS 



Number of Parts 


Recommended 
Paper Weight 


Weight of Carbon 
Insert Sheet 


1 


15 lb (56 g/m2) 




2, 3, or 4 


13.5 lb (50 g/m2) 


5 1b (19g/m2) 


5 or 6 


12 lb (45 g/m2) 


5 1b (19g/m2) 



Recommended maximum weight for single-ply paper is 24 lb. (90 
g/m 2 ). Maximum forms thickness should not exceed 0.025 inches 
(0.613 mm). Printing materials up to 125# Tag (226 g/m 2 ) or 110# 
Index (199 g/m 2 ) can be handled. 



0.25 in. (6.35 mm) *" 




ffi 




t 

0.50 in. (12.70 mm) 

I 










y^ 

o 




0.156 in. (3.97 mm) 




r-J 



FIGURE B-l SPROCKET HOLE DETAILS 



GEK-99044 



B-1 



Appendix B Paper Specifications 



Company 



Catalog Number 



Description 



Avery 



4162 



Clear Label, One-wide 3 1/2" X 
15/16" 



Moore 



J21147 



24-lb White Wove Envelope with Keen 
Edge 



J13706 



24-lb White Wove Envelope 



J21105 



24-lb Ivory Laid Textured Envelope 



8530SG 



One-wide Tab Card, Computer Punch 
Card 



1530SG 



Two-wide Tab Card, Computer Punch 
Card 



1412T, 1412TC 



One-part 11" X 14 7/8" 15-lb 



1412T, 1412RH 



1412T, 1412TQ, 
1412RH 



Two-part 11" X 14 7/8" 15-lb 



Three-part 11" X 14 7/8" 15-lb 



1412T, 1412TE 



1412T 



Four-part 11" X 14 7/8" 15-lb 



1412T, 1412TQ, 
1412NP 



Five-part 11" X 14 7/8" 15-lb 



Six-part 11" X 14 7/8" 15-lb 



TC7 



110-lbTime Cards 



21022 



20-lb Laid Textured 



13557 



Six-part Self-Mailer 



13060 



13086 



Seven-part Universal Mailer 



Two-wide 3" X 5" Card 100-lb. White 
Tag Stock 



29264 



1410Q 



Mini-printer Label 3 1/2" X 15/16" 

tv j_ -i/i 1-7 I r»n ~\.r i -i m 



1410CKP 



Two-part 14 7/8" X 11" 



8510 



One-part 14 7/8" X 11" 



8512TQ 



One-part 8 1/2" X 11' 



8512TQ 



Three-part 8 1/2" X 11" 



13078 



Six-part 8 1/2" X 11" 



3" X 5", 100-lb. White Tag Stock 



9510J 



Four-part 9 1/2" X 11" 



9510CK, 9510J, 
9510CJ 



One-part 9 1/2" X 11" 



1182T 



1280J, 1280CK 



One-part 113/4"X8 1/2" 



1482TA, 1488TH 



One-part 12" X 8 1/2' 



NNSY 4430/26 



One-part 14 7/8" X 8 1/2" 



Four-part 9 1/2" X 11" 



Pl-9511-15-00 



Pl-951 1-20-00 



One-part 9 1/2" X 11" 15-lb 



13805 



One-part 9 1/2" X 11" 20-lb 



One-part 20-lb. 



28084 



Label, One-wide 3 1/2" X 15/16" 



28118 



Label, Two-wide 3 1/2" X 15/16" 



28142 



Label, Three-wide 3 1/2" X 15/16" 



28183 



Label, Four-wide 3 1/2" X 15/16" 



NCR 



2-10-L6 



6-part Self-Mailer 



6240174082 



8-1/2" X 11" Carbonless 5-part 



211093 



Single-part 11" X 14 7/8" 15-lb 



5000 Series User's Manual 



B-2 



GEK-99044 



APPENDIX C CONSIDERATIONS FOR OPERATION 

■ Voltage: 120 VAC and 240 VAC ±15% auto range seeking. 

■ Frequency: 48 to 65 Hz. 

■ Power Consumption: 





500-LPM 


1000-LPM 


1800-LPM 


Idle 35 Watts 


35 Watts 


50 Watts 


Printing 213 Watts 


350 Watts 


674 Watts 



Dissipated Power (maximum): 

500-LPM 400 Watts = 1370 BTU/hour 
1000-LPM 524 Watts = 1795 BTU/hour 
1800-LPM 1167 Watts = 3997 BTU/hour 

Weight: 



Cabinet Model 


Unboxed 


Boxed 


5050/5100 (55 dBa) 


175 lbs. 
97.3 kg 


220 lbs. 
99.7 kg 


5050/5100 (50 dBa) 


295 lbs. 
133.8 kg 


340 lbs. 
154.2 kg 


5050/5100 (60 dBa) 


169 lbs. 
214 lbs. 


76.8 kg 
97.3 kg 


5180 (55 dBa) 


320 lbs. 
145 kg 


404 lbs. 
138 kg 


5180 (52 dBa) 


420 lbs. 
191 kg 


462 lbs. 
210 kg 



Overall size: 



Cabinet Model 


Physical Size (HxWxD) 


5050/5100 (55 dBa) 


42 x 26.5x25 in. 
1077 x 679 x 635 mm 


5050/5100 (50 dBa) 


42 x 27 x 29 in. 
1077 x 686 x 737 mm 


5050/5100 (60 dBa) 


39 x 26.6x25 in. 
991 x 679 x 635 mm 


5180 (55 dBa) 


48 x 29 x 25 in. 
1219x737x635 mm 


5180 (52 dBa) 


42 x 30 x 29 in. 
1080 x 760 x 725 mm 



An additional 20 inches (50.8cm) of clearance is required in front of 
the printer to open the pedestal door. 

An additional 22 inches of clearance is required in the rear of the 
5050/5100 (50 dBa) Cabinet Model printer to open the rear cabinet 
door. 

An additional 20 inches of clearance is required in the rear of the 
5180 (52 dBa) Cabinet Model printer to open the rear cabinet door. 



GEK-99044 



C-1 



Appendix C. Considerations for Operation 



■ Paper Handling: 

5180 (55 dBa) Cabinet Model - allow an additional 17 inches of 
clearance in the rear of the printer for the paper handling shelf 
option. 

5050/5100 (55 dBa) Cabinet Model - allow an additional 10 inches of 
clearance in the rear of the printer for the paper handling shelf 
option. 

■ Operating Environment: 

Temperature 39 to 104° F4 to 40° C 

Humidity 15 to 90% noncondensing 

Note 

For UK installations, a 10-amp fuse must be installed on the 

mains lead. 



5000 Series User's Manual C-2 GEK-99044 



APPENDIX D 

PARTS, ACCESSORIES, CONSUMABLES AND 

OPTIONS 

The items listed below are available from an authorized GENICOM 
distributor, service agent, or from GENICOM headquarters at the 
following address: 

GENICOM Corporation 

Parts Sales 

1 Genicom Drive 

Waynesboro, Virginia 22980-1999 

1-800-535-4364 

FAX: (540) 949-1890 

Electronic Bulletin Board: (540) 949-1576 
(Check for current printer drivers and the updated replacement and 
spare part listings) 

When ordering, specify description, part or catalog number, and 
quantity desired. (Have the model number of the printer available). 



Description 


Part or Catalog Number 


5050/5100 Ribbon Cartridge (50 M) 


4A0040B02 


5050/5100 Ribbon Cartridge (75 M) 


4A0040B05 


5050/5100 Ribbon Cartridge 
Fast Drying - Special Applications 


4A0040B11 


5180 Ribbon Cartridge (125 M) 
Long Life 


44A509160G02 


5180 Ribbon Cartridge (75 M) 


44A509160G03 


5180 Ribbon Cartridge (50 M) 
IR Readable 


44A509160G04 


5180 Ribbon Cartridge 

Fast Drying - Special Applications 


44A509160G08 



GEK-99044 



D-1 



Appendix D 
Parts, Accessories, Consumables, and Options 



APPENDIX E. FONT PRINT SAMPLES 



The following samples were printed at 10 characters per inch (CPI) at 
6 lines per inch (LPI). Chapter 3 and 4 has complete information on 
available font styles and CPI/ LPI settings. 



HIGH SPEED FONT 



i s 3 ^5*73^ : ? < - > ? * ae cdefghi jk e, mnqp3» stu wjcvz i \ i *_ 1 a b c ti e f ? 

£3H-5t-7S^ ;>■£ = > " -^ AeCDEFgHIJKL KiNGprjF ^TLVWXYZ t \ :-"■_ _ - Q bed fl f 5 ii 
3*tB67S* t ; <=>?MBCS>GFGHIJKLMHOPQRSTWW>C¥^E \ 1- _' afecSef ?* i 
H5&78* : i ■■ = > 7 Ae C E'EF GH I J KL MWQF GR 5TUVWXYZ I \ 1 A _ v *S c d ff f 3 A i j 
5*75* £ ;< = >?^A3CDEFaHIJKLr^OpQRSTlJV r VXV^C\3- r >_ b 0l&Cdef^ri^ jt 
^7S<* 1 ? < => ?9ABCuEFGHT JKL'MNCPQRBTWWHYZ H K-_ ' flbcdftf fir ijl i 
73* SK-> ?(»ABCDEFCH1 JKL WNO?s3Fi5TLpyWXVZ L \ 3 A „ ' ffi &Cd e# S ft 5 j I I 3 



GOTHIC DRAFT - DATA PROCESSING FONT 



01 2345673? s 1 <*> ?eABCD£FGH1 JKLMNGPQRETU VHX VZt\} A « % a.bc d e f 
1 23 454 7S9 3 K ■ >?tf AECDEF SH I J KLMNOPCSRSTU VWX V ZC\0*_^bttfefg 
£345£7S9 ? 1 < = >?*?AGCDEFGH I JKLMNOPBRSTUVWMYZt\l *_ ^abedef^ h 
3456789s ;< = >?^AECDEFSHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVH>C¥^C>3 A _^it>cdof gh i 
4567S9 s ? < = > ?4? A ECDEFG H I JKLMNO FttRSTU VWX YZ E \ ] A _ h ab C d « f -j h ij 
S67S9:5<=>?eAeCDEFGHIJKLMN0PQRSTLJVWKYZ[:M^^bcrfefghf Jk 
67£? : f O >?£ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTLIVUM VZ E\3 *_ T abe dsf 3 h e J k I 
7S9 1 ( < - > ?£ ABCDEFGH I JKLhNCPBRSTU VWKYZ C\l A _Vbcdefghijklm 



GOTHIC NEAR LETTER QUALITY 



Q1234567&9: ; < = 37*MBCDEF&HI JKLMK&PQGSTUVUXYlEVl* abedef 
1234567a?- t< = ^T<?ABCDEF6HIJKLMHOPQff5TUVWX^ZC\3' T abcdefg 
Z345S7BS; ;^ = >?3ABCD£FGHJJKLMN0PQR5T[JVWXirZt\: i _ T abcdefgh 
3456789: ;<=r>?<*ABC:DEFGHIJKLMNQPQRSTLIVWXVZ[:\] Jl _-abcdefgh1 
456789: ;C = >?(»AECDEFGHrJKLMWPQR5TUVWXVZC\3 Jfc _ ^bcdpfg^iij 
5d7S9; ;ca>?@ABCD^FQHIJKLMN0PQRSTUtfUXYZC\J d| _'al»cd4fBh1Jk 
45789: ;< = ^?4aAecoeFGKIJKLMHOPORSTUVWXY^C>J*_ h ibcdefgh1JkT 
7S3: j< = >?^ABCDEFGHUKUMNOFQfiSTUVWXVZC\J^_ abcdfifghijklm 



CHARACTER GRAPHICS FONT 




wilriiErpjTl 
iSrwEo-pTi^fl^ai 



GEK-99044 



E-1 



Appendix E. Font Print Samples 



CORRESPONDENCE FONT 

(BETTER QUALITY THAN DRAFT-BETTER SPEED THAN NLQ) 



123*56739: j c->?ejABCOEFGHIJM.nAlOF[}RSTLJVWXYZ[ 
234 5*789 ; E {->?PAGCDEFGHI JKLftNOFQRSTUVWXYZ[\ 
3*56789 : ; <== > ^^BCDEFCM [ JKLMttQI*QR5TIJYWKYZ C\1 
4 567S3 r j < ' ? ^ABCDEFCHIJKLPINOFOR 5TU VWXY* C ^ D " 
56749 : ; < => 7GABCDEFGH IJKUINQPQRS TUVWX YZ [ \ 3"_ 
£789 ; ■ < » > ?p A6CDEFOH UKLHNOFQRSTU VWXYZ [ N 3 *_ n 
7S9 : - c- > 7<MSCDEFGrtl JKLinNOPqRSTUVWXYZLV ] *_ ' a 



J A _M&cdefgh 

abcd#fghi j* 
abedef^hfjfcl 
bcdef^M jk 1 m 



OCR-A FONT 



OCR-B FONT 



0133MSL7M: \ <=>^aABCJCFGHlJi:L«W0PiaRSTUVWXY2C\3AVHabcdBf 

la3M5t7fl^i^< = >^aABCPEFGHlJELf1WOPc2ftSTUVWXYlCMA4 l ^flbcdofg 
33H5I#7M J^^sfaABCfiEFGHlJKLnlVOPflRSTlJVUXYZCMAV^aGcdBfgft 
3^5ti7fl^J %<=>^flABCSEFGHIiJi:LI1hlOPdR5TUVIilXY£CMAVriabcdafgni 
l iSfci7fi , l:-<=>faAeCDEFGHlJCLflNOP0RSTLSVyKVZC\aAVHjbcdefghij 
5t?aT3t,<=>^3ABCtEF6HIJKLf1N0P0RSTtJVUXYZEMAit'Jabcclefghljk 
U?aTs- 1 <»>^i)AQCDEFGHlJKLnNOP(3R£TUVUXYZC\jAVHiiticdsfghiikl 
7G1 2 *, <=>^3 ABCDEFGHIJKLnNOpflRSTU VWXYZC\ J AVHabcdof gh 1 jk In 



1234 56789 :;<™>?3ABC&£fGHlJKLKH0PaRSTUVUXYZCU*_"*btd*f 
1234567a9:;<»>?aAeC&EF6HlJKLMWOPa»STlJ.VyXY;C\3 Jfc n «bcdeffl 
234567B9=;<->?aABC&EF<iHUKLHN0F*RSTUVVaYZnD* T abedafgh 
J4S67S9=;< = >?aAeCD£FfiHIJKLWN0P^ftSTUVtfXY£t\] A _ , abcd«fahi 
* 56719 :;< = >? 3 ABC DEF SHU KLMNQPaRSTUVWXt 2C\:T_ abedtfg hi j 
567B9:^< = >?3AeCD^FOHlJKL«H0PaRSTUVll)(TZCXD*_ abcd*^eh1 jt 
47B9:;<=>?&A&CfrEFGHIJKLHIfGPQRSTLIVUKYlCO~ n *btde f ghi j h t 
7afl:;<=>?aABC0EFGHIJIttMNOPqfiSTUVtfXlfZC\J A _ T sbcdefflhlikLa 



COURIER NLQ FONT 



0>Z34567a9:;<n=>7aABCDEFSHiJKLMNOPfl«STUVWJt¥;C\3 fc _ Jhtde^ 

1 23456789: ;<»>? aABC&EFGHIJKLMHOPflfiSTUVtf XYZE\]^_ n abtdeffl 
234S«7»9:;<">?aA8CI>EF5HIJKt.MN0PQRSTUVMKTlt\3*_ , abcd*ffl)l 
3*56789 ^;<*>?aAec&EFQHl J KLrtNOPftlTSTUVWX VI CO*_" 4bcil* fflhi 
i567fl?:;<^1aABCBEFGKtJKLMtfOPGRSTlJVW*Y2CO Jfc a&Cdtfghlj 
567afl!;<=>^aA&C0EFGHlJKLHHOPClRSTUVW i XYIC\3*_ ibtd*fghijt 
67fl9:;< = >?3ABCDEFGHIJKLMNQPQR'5TLIVVXir£CVJ"Vabcdef ghi j ft I 
78^:;<™>?aAeCDEFGHlJKLMH0PlRSTlVWXYrC\] A , b abcdtf9hijkLm 



ITALIC NLQ FONT 



123456739: ;t * >?$ABtQfFG# UK LHNQPQ85TVVVXY Z£\l* _~ &bc4*f$ 
Z3456789: ;< = >?#A$£DFfGffIJKlHNQPQtiSriIYitXrZf\J" T itrttfcf9b 
3456789: ;f*>??A3a}IfGttfJtUWQPQMSTUVVXrl£\I-_ T aI>c<t<!rghi 
45678$: ; r'>?tAiCDFn>NfJj£tMNOPQXSTvVUJtYir\]*_aAc<fefgktJ 
J£J9$z; i*J?#ABC&£tG}IfJJCLHJIFQPQRSTUVUXrZ{\7~_aAc(fef$btjk 
6789; ;€ = >MASC$£fGBti;KLMMPQXSru/MXrzc\}-_**&cif*rvhtJ*! 
7&9;;<**?9A3CQ£F$tflJKLM#§PQfSTttrifXrzr\}~ * vtwtfefQhf ft ft 



5000 Series User's Manual 



C-2 



GEK-99044 



HIGH SPEED 2 



0123H56>TS9 5 5 < =s > ^tfABC ! "#£%& « «: > #4-9 - . /0123H567S9 J 
123H56789! ? < = 5?(»ABC « »#$%&» < :■ #-M - . / O 1 23^56789 5 i 
23HS6789 S 7 < = >?(JABC ! "#»%& « « :« *+ 9 - . /OX23H567S9 S i -e 
3HS6789 S 9 < = >?PABC 1 »#35%S: ' O ■* 4- ? - . /0123456789 S 5 <- 



HSCi739 S » <=s> ?(8ABC 1 "#£K& ' C > *+ 9 — « /0123H567S9 I 
S67S9 S 5 < = >?C»ABC ! iJ #SS%S: ' * :• #••+• 9 -, /Q123H56789 S 5 
6 789! ? < = >?PABC 1 "&%XSr. '{)#+?-, / O 1 23H5&T39 S ? < 



<s>?(»ABCDEF< 
= >?'?A8CDEFGI 
:>?(JABCDEFGH: 
?'?ABCDEFQHI. 



f < = ::-7«7»abcde:fghiji 

: = >?<?ABCDEFGHIJKI 
= > ? PABCDEFGHI JKLI 



CANADIAN PST 



I 1 !' 



GEK-99044 



E-3 



Appendix E. Font Print Samples 



Appendix F. Flash Upgrade Instructions 



Maintenance 

Upgrade Flash 



Upgrade Status: 
Ready 



This printer is equipped with flash memory. Should an upgrade be 
necessary, a PC may be used to provide the upgrade via the printer's 
parallel port. 

Note 

Update may be performed using another interface port, such as 

Ethernet, Twinax, Coax, etc. Substitute the appropriate drive 

letter and interface port for the type of interface used for 

upgrading the printer. 

1. Load the new flash software file < filename. lod> to a convenient 
folder on a PC storage media, such as the "C:" hard drive. 

2. Connect a six foot Centronics parallel cable from PC's LPT1 port 
to the standard parallel port on the back of the printer. 

3. (Detach any other cables that may be connecting the printer to a 
host computer in order to prevent possible data transmission 
problems). 

Use the following steps to perform a flash software upgrade: 

Note 

Make sure the printer is connected to the host to be used for 
upgrading code before proceeding. 

1 . Place the printer in a status to receive a flash upgrade using the 
following procedure: 

2. Place the printer into an OFFLINE state via the OFFLINE/ ONLINE 
control panel key. 

3. Select Menu, then Maintenance via the menu browse keys. 

4. While in the Maintenance menu, press the < (left) or ► (right) 
menu browse pushbutton until Upgrade Flash is displayed in the 
lower right corner of the display window. 

5. Press the Select pushbutton to upgrade the printer. Ready will be 
displayed in the lower left corner of the display window. To exit 
this function without upgrading the software, re-cycle the power 
to the printer. 

6. Use the following procedure to continue the upgrade flash 
procedure: 

7. Bring up a DOS window on your PC. Change to the directory 
where the upgrade file was stored. At the DOS command line in 
the PC type the following command: 

8. Ocopy/b <filename>.lod LPT1: 

9. <filename> is the name of the upgrade file used for the software 
upgrade.) .lod is the file name extension required for the upgrade. 
C> is the drive letter for the PC. 

10. Press the Return (also known as Enter) key on the PC, monitoring 
the LCD display for error messages. 



GEK-99044 



F-1 



Appendix F. Flash Upgrade Instructions 



11. When upgrade is complete, the printer will re-boot itself and 
return to an online status. If the printer does not reboot, 
disconnect the cable from the host and recycle the power. Printer 
will power up in the online status. 



5000 Series User's Manual F-2 GEK-99044 



APPENDIX G DESCRIPTION OF STRAPPING OPTIONS 

This appendix contains descriptions for firmware strap settings, 
which are changed using the menu options available. See "Using the 
Set Up Menu" in Chapter 5 for procedures to enable/ disable an 
option (setting.) 



GEK-99044 G-1 Appendix G. Description of Strapping Options 



LEGACY PARALLEL HARDWARE STRAP DEFINITIONS 



Strap meanings are the same for Centronics, DP (Short) and DP 
(Long); however, the straps are set individually for each. If there is a 
Centronics and DP (Short) both installed each may be setup 
separately. 

Table 1 
I/F Straps 



HBits 
01-32 


Meaning if Enabled 


Meaning if Disabled 


01 


Prime High = Buffer Clear. 


Prime Low = Buffer Clear. 


02 


Interrupt on all Control Codes. 


Interrupt disabled on all Control Codes, except LF, VT, 
FF, CR, DC1 andDC3. 


03 


DEL does not cause an Interrupt. 


DEL causes an Interrupt. 


04 


DEL does not cause Prime. 


DEL causes Prime. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


07 


Underline character treated as CR. 


Underline character printed. 


08 


PI Lead causes Interrupt. 


PI Lead does not cause Interrupt. 


09 


ACK lead does not reflect 
ONLINE/LOCAL status. 05 must be 
enabled. 


ACK lead reflects ONLINE/ LOCAL status. 


10 


Character conversion to space 
enabled. (See 41-48.) 


Character conversion to space disabled. 


11 


CR not decoded. 


CR will generate an Interrupt. 


12 


FF not decoded. 


FF will generate an Interrupt. 


13 


LF not decoded. 


LF will generate an Interrupt. 


14 


VT not decoded. 


VT will generate an Interrupt. 


15 


DC3 not decoded. 


DC3 will generate an Interrupt. 


16 


DC1 not decoded. 


DC1 will generate an Interrupt. 


17 


Busy does not reflect ACK. 


Busy reflects ACK. 


18 


Busy/ Demand per character. 


No Busy/ Demand per character. 


19 


No software control of Busy. 


Software control of busy. 


20 


Busy does not reflect 

(ONLINE/ LOCAL) FAULT/ PO status. 


Busy reflects (ONLINE/ LOCAL) FAULT/PO status. 


21 


Busy does not reflect (FAULT) 
ONLINE/ LOCAL status. 


Busy reflects (FAULT) ONLINE/LOCAL status. 


22 


Busy does not reflect (PO) 
ONLINE/LOCAL/PO status. 


Busy reflects (PO) ONLINE/LOCAL/PO status. 


23 


ACK does not reflect PO. 


ACK reflects PO. 


24 


ACK does not reflect FAULT. 


ACK reflects FAULT. 


25 


Data leads 0-7 are active high. 


Data leads 0-7 are active low. 


26 


Busy is active high. 


Busy is active low. 


27 


PI is active high. 


PI is active low. 


28 


PI is enabled. 


PI is disabled. 


29 


STB is active high. 


STB is active low. 


30 


SELECT is active high. 


SELECT is active low. 


31 


PO is active high. 


PO is active low. 


32 


FAULT is active high. 


FAULT is active low. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



G-2 



GEK-99044 



Table 1 (Continued) 
I/F Straps 



HBits 
33-64 


Meaning if Enabled 


Meaning if Disabled 


33 


Disable Demand delay. 


Enable Demand delay. 


34-35 


Set ACK delay from Strobe. 


34 35 Delav 


Disable Disable None 
Disable Enable 1 jusec 
Enable Disable 2 jusec 
Enable Enable 3 jusec 


36-37 


Set ACK Pulse Width. 


36 37 Width 
Disable Disable None 
Disable Enable 1 jusec 
Enable Disable 2 jusec 
Enable Enable 3 jusec 


38 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


39 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


40 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


41-48 


Used with strap 10 to select space character substitution. 41 corresponds with Bit 1 of the 
character code. 


49-64 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



LEGACY PARALLEL SOFTWARE STRAP DEFINITIONS 

Table 2 
I/F Straps 



Bits 
01-32 


Meaning if Enabled 


Meaning if Disabled 


01-03 


Reserved for future use. 


Reserved for future use. 


04 


No Prime on Select. 


Prime on Select. 


05 


No Fault on PO or Deselect. 


Fault on PO or Select. 


06-07 


Reserved for future use. 


Reserved for future use. 


08 


Pass 8 bit Data. 


Bit 8 equals 0. 


09-32 


Reserved for future use. 


Reserved for future use. 


Bits 
33-64 


Meaning if Enabled 


Meaning if Disabled 


33-39 


Reserved for future use. 


Reserved for future use. 


40 


Disable Parallel timeout. 


Parallel timeout. Enabled. 


41-64 


Reserved for future use. 


Reserved for future use. 



GEK-99044 



G-3 



Appendix G Description of Strapping Options 



GENERAL PRINTER OPTIONS DEFINITIONS 

Table 3 
Group 1 



Straps 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


TOF set move forward - use forward motion. 


TOF set move forward - use reverse 
motion. 


02 


Paper Low = PO Fault - paper out fault. 


Paper Low = PO Fault - paper low fault. 


03 


Deselect on Paper Low - enable if 02 is enabled. 


Deselect on Paper Low - disabled. 


04 


Auto low paper print to end of last sheet - 
override 02 and 03. 


Auto low paper print to end of last 
sheet disabled. 


05 


Paper Jam Fault unreported. 


Paper Jam Fault reported. 


06 


Reverse paper motion permitted on PL. 


Reverse paper motion caused PO Fault. 


07 


Autoview feature enabled. 


Autoview feature disabled. 


08 


Enable TTMI kick start enabled. 


Enable TTMI kick start disabled. 


09 


Truncate slews at TOF enabled. 


Truncate slews at TOF disabled. 


10 


Ribbon weld fault disabled. 


Ribbon weld fault enabled. 


11 


Descending draft characters descending. 


Descending draft characters non- 
descending. 


12 


Descending NLQ characters descending. 


Descending NLQ characters non- 
descending. 


13 


CPI reset at font change - cpi reset to 10 cpi. 


CPI reset at font change - cpi retained. 


14 


Derive 12 cpi from lOcpi. 


Derive 12 cpi from 13 cpi. 


15 


Derive 15 cpi from 16 cpi. 


Derive 15 cpi from 13 cpi. 


16 


Enable Serial I/F error print - display/ print serial 
I/F errors. 


Enable Serial I/F error print - "*" for 
Serial I/F errors. 


17-32 


Reserved for future use. 


Reserved for future use. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



G-4 



GEK-99044 



Table 
Group 



4 
2 



Straps 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


Repeat bell during fault - repeated 
rings. 


Repeat bell during fault - single ring. 


02 


Disable bell disabled. 


Disable bell enabled. 


03 


Enable slashed zero - slashed zero. 


Enable slashed zero - normal zero. 


04 


Power-up state - online state. 


Power-up state - local state. 


05 


Power-up in last state - use last state. 


Power-up in last state - use strap 4. 


06 


Menu exit condition - exit after 1 
minute. 


Menu exit condition - no exit on inactive. 


07 


Top-of-Form control - disable TOF on 
remote. 


Top-of-Form control - enable TOF on remote. 


08 


Received DC1-DC3 operation - 
Select/Deselect.. 


Received DC1-DC3 operation - No 
Select/Deselect.. 


09 


Substitute EURO character (8859-X @ 
0XA4) - substitute EURO character. 


Substitute EURO character (8859-X @ 0XA4) - no 
EURO substitution. 


10 


Page mode imaging enabled. 


Page mode imaging disabled. 


11 


Paper at top of Bar Code after printing 
- top of BC after print. 


Paper at top of Bar Code after printing - no 
position change after BC. 


12 


Staggered Barcodes - enable staggered 
barcodes. 


Staggered Barcodes - disable staggered barcodes. 


13 


Paper at top of OVERSIZE after 
printing - top of OV after print. 


Paper at top of OVERSIZE after printing - no 
position change after OV. 


14 


Substitute EURO character (all pages @ 
0XFE - Windows) - substitute EURO 
character. 


Substitute EURO character (all pages @ 0XFE - 
Windows) - no EURO substitution. 


15 


Rotate Bar Code Mode - rotate relative 
to orientation. 


Rotate Bar Code Mode - rotate about portrait x,y. 


16 


Force bar code new page - move to new 
page if BC > bottom margin. 


Force bar code new page - disable forced new 
page. 


17-32 


Reserved for future use. 


Reserved for future use. 



GEK-99044 



G-5 



Appendix G Description of Strapping Options 



EMULATION OPTION DESCRIPTIONS 

Table 5 
ANSI (4800) 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


SI /SO selects Oversize and Bar code- 
select via SI/ SO. 


SI/ SO selects Oversize and Bar code- 
no selection via SI /SO 


02 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


03 


ESC C control - disable ESC C 
sequence. 


ESC C control - reset when ESC C is 
received. 


04 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


GENCIC control - set (80-8F as 
control) . 


GENCIC control - reset (80-9F per 
GENCS2). 


07 


GENCS2 control - set (80-9F, 15, 
print).) 


GENCS2 control - reset (80-9F 
ignore) 


08 


Line grid control (LF = next lpi grid) 


Line grid control (LF = LF) 


09 


Dbl strike /shadow control - Double 
Strike 


Dbl strike /shadow control - Shadow. 


10 


Character Graphics /Postnet - Char 
Graphics in SCR[21 esc[12m 


Character Graphics /Postnet - 
Canad. Postnet in SGR[21 escfl2m 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



Table 6 
ANSI (4410) 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


SI /SO selects Oversize and Bar code- 
Select. 


SI/ SO selects Oversize and Bar code- 
Ignore SI /SO 


02 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


03 


ESC C control - disable ESC C 
sequence. 


ESC C control - reset when ESC C is 
received. 


04 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


GENCIC control - set (80-8F as 
control) . 


GENCIC control - reset (80-9F per 
GENCS2). 


07 


GENCS2 control - set (80-9F, 15, 
print).) 


GENCS2 control - reset (80-9F 
ignore) 


08 


Line grid control (LF = LF) 


Line grid control (LF = LF) 


09 


Dbl strike /shadow control - Double 
Strike 


Dbl strike /shadow control - Shadow. 


10 


Character Graphics /Postnet - Char 
Graphics in SCR[21 escfl2m 


Character Graphics /Postnet - 
Canad. Postnet in SGR[21 esc[12m 


11 


Bit 8 control - 8th bit is alternative 
font. 


Bit 8 control - 8th bit selects 256 
characters. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



G-6 



GEK-99044 



Table 7 
Proprinter III XL 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


RESERVED (Slashed Zero) This strap is a copy of the upper level 
ENG_OP_SLASH_ZERO strap. 


02 


Line Length - 8 inches. 


Line Length - 13.2 inches. 


03 


Condensed Print - condensed @ 12cpi 
= 12 cpi. 


Condensed Print - condensed @ 
12cpi = 20 cpi. 


04 


Initial Code page - Multinational. 


Initial Code page - USA. 


05 


Character Set Select default - 
Character set 2 . 


Character Set Select default - 
Character set 1 . 


06 


Form Length - 12" Form. 


Form Length - 11" Form. 


07 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


08 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


09 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


10 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



Table 8 
EPSON FX286e 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


Condensed Print - enabled. 


Condensed Print - disabled. 


02 


Italics font control - codes 128-255 are 
Code Page. 


Italics font control - codes 128-255 
are Italics. 


03 


Default Print Quality - default print 
quality is NLQ. 


Default Print Quality - default print 
quality is draft. 


04 


Default Perf Skip - 1 inch per skip 
default. 


Default Perf Skip - No perf skip 
default. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


07 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


08 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


09 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


10 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



GEK-99044 



G-7 



Appendix G Description of Strapping Options 



Table 9 
ESCP2 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


Condensed Print - enabled. 


Condensed Print - disabled. 


02 


Italics font control - codes 128-255 are 
Code Page. 


Italics font control - codes 128-255 
are Italics. 


03 


Default Print Quality - default print 
quality is NLQ. 


Default Print Quality - default print 
quality is draft. 


04 


Default Perf Skip - 1 inch per skip 
default. 


Default Perf Skip - No perf skip 
default. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


07 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


08 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


09 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


10 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



Table 10 
Printronix Pseries 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


Overstrike - enabled. 


Overstrike - disabled. 


02 


ACK selects LPI for 1 line - 10.3 LPI. 


ACK selects LPI for 1 line - 8 LPI. 


03 


VFU load - PI required for VFU load. 


VFU load - No PI required for VFU 
load. 


04 


Defines codes 80 to 9F - 80 to 9F are 
printable. 


Defines codes 80 to 9F - 80 to 9F are 
control codes. 


05 


Backspace (BS = BS). 


Backspace (BS = Double High). 


06 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


07 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


08 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


09 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


10 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



G-8 



GEK-99044 



Table 11 
Printronix P300/600 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


Edit Line (CR = CR). 


Edit Line (CR = edit mode). 


02 


Restrict LPI (restrict lpi to 8). 


Restrict LPI (non-restricted lpi) . 


03 


VFU load - PI required for VFU load. 


VFU load - No PI required for VFU 
load. 


04 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


07 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


08 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


09 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


10 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



Table 12 
Dec LG Plus 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


Unsolicited Reporting - enabled (See 
strap S-2). 


Unsolicited Reporting - disabled 
(default). 


02 


Unsolicited status report size - extended 
unsolicited reports. 


Unsolicited status report size - brief 
unsolicited reports. 


03 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


04 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


07 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


08 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


09 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


10 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



GEK-99044 



G-9 



Appendix G Description of Strapping Options 



Table 13 
Dec PPL3 



Options 


Meaning if Active 


Meaning if Inactive 


01 


Condensed printing in ISO-LATIN9 code 
page. 


Condensed printing in ISO-LATIN9 
code page. 


02 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


03 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


04 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


05 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


06 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


07 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


08 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


09 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


10 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


11 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


12 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


13 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


14 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


15 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 


16 


Reserved. 


Reserved. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



G-10 



GEK-99044 



APPENDIX H. 

INTERFACE EMULATION COMPATIBILITY 

Printer Emulation Vs Filter 



Printer 
Emulation 


Filter 


QMS 


IGP 


scs 


IPDS 


Hex 
Print 


Hex 
Pass 


ANSI (4800) 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


ANSI (4410) 


X 


X 






X 


X 


FX286e 


X 


X 






X 


X 


Proprinter IIIXL 


X 


X 






X 


X 


P300/600 


X 


X 






X 


X 


Dec LG+ 










X 


X 


Pseries 










X 


X 


DEC PPL/ 3 










X 


X 


ESCP2 










X 


X 



Note: Only one printer emulation can be active. If SCS and IPDS Filter are selected on any port 
(Expansion 1 or 2), ANSI (4800) printer emulation is automatically selected. Only two Filters may 
be active on an I/F port. 
QMS and IGP are mutually exclusive. SCS and IPDS are mutually exclusive. 



Filter Combinations 





QMS 


IGP 


SCS 


IPDS 


Hex 
Print 


Hex 
Pass 


QMS 






X 




X 


X 


IGP 






X 




X 


X 


SCS 


X 


X 






X 


X 


IPDS 










X 


X 


Hex Print 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


Hex Pass 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 





GEK-99044 



H-1 



Appendix H Interface Emulation Compatibility 



Interface Port and Filter Compatibility 



I/F Port 


Filter 


QMS 


IGP 


scs 


IPDS 


Hex Print 


RS 232/422 
Serial 


X 


X 






X 


1283 Parallel 


X 


X 






X 


Ethernet 10 
Bt/10B2 


X 


X 




(future) 


X 


Ethernet 
10/100 base T 


X 


X 




(future) 


X 


Token Ring 


X 


X 




(future) 


X 


IBM TX/CX 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Legacy 
CENTRONICS 


X 


X 






X 


Legacy DPLL 


X 


X 






X 


Legacy DPSL 


X 


X 






X 



Horizontal/Vertical Tab Id 
Maximum Slots 



Printer 
Emulation 


Maximum Tab Id 
Slots 


Horizontal 


Vertical 


ANSI (4800) 


22 


12 


ANSI (4410) 


22 


12 


FX286e 


32 


32 


Proprinter IIIXL 


32 


32 


P300/600 


32 


32 


Dec LG+ 


32 


67 


Pseries 


32 


32 


DEC PPL/ 3 


32 


64 


ESCP2 


32 


32 



5000 Series User's Manual 



H-2 



GEK-99044 



APPENDIX I. LCD MENU MAPS 





Main 
Menu 






































Operator Menu 




Maintenance Menu 




Setup Menu 




Menu Control 



Note: Operator, Maintenance, and Setup menus are expanded on separate 

pages. 



Operator 



Main Menu 



Menu 
Control 



Allow Menus 



Setup 



Maintenance 



Note: To display this menu, see Menu Control in User's Manual. 



GEK-99044 



1-1 



Appendix I. LCD Menu Maps 



Main Menu 



Operator 



New Ribbon 



Select Format 



*Select to 
Reset 



Font 
Style 



Default 



00M 



* Not active if Ribbon 
Monitor is disabled 



Data Proces 
Correspond 
Gothic NLQ 
Graphics 
Courier NLQ 
High Speed 2 
OCR-A 
OCR-B 
Italic NLQ 
High Speed 
CanadianPST 



Char Set/Country 



Character Set 



USA CP 437 
Multi CP 850 
Code Page 852 
Code Page 853 
Code Page 855 
Code Page 858 
Code Page 860 
Code Page 863 
Code Page 864 
Code Page 865 
Code Page 866 
Code Page 867 
Greek CP 437 
Dec MultiNtnl 
Roman 8 
Mozowia CP 
Turkish CP 
Greek CP 851 
Kamen 
ISO-8859-1 
ISO-8859-2 
ISO-8859-3 
ISO-8859-4 
ISO-8859-5 
ISO-8859-6 
ISO-8859-7 
ISO-8859-8 
ISO-8859-9 
ISO-8859-1 5 
Dec Supp 
Dec Tech 
Dec Sped Graph 
Dec ISO-Latin 1 
Dec British 
Dec Finnish 
Dec French 
Dec FrCanadian 
Dec German 
Dec ISO Italian 
Dec JIS Roman 
None 



Dec Nor/Dan 
Dec Spanish 
Dec Swedish 
Dec ISO Nor/Dan 
Dec Dutch 
Dec Swiss 
Dec Portuguese 
Dec Legal 
Dec Hebrew 
Dec Hebrew Supp 
Dec ISO Lat/Heb 
Dec Katakana 
Dec ANSI 
ISO Latin 2 
ISO Latin 5 
Greek Supp 
Turkish 7-Bit 
Turkish 8-Bit 
ISO Lat/Gr Supp 
ISO Lat/Cy Supp 
PC 437 Greek 
PC 861 Icelandic 
PC 869 Greek 
USSR (GOST) 
BRASCII 
ABICOMP 
PC 857 (Turkish) 
ISO Latin 1T 
Bulgaria 

Code MJK (CSFR) 
Estonia 

PC774 Lithuania 
PC 866 LAT 
ECMA-94-1 Mult 
KU 42 (KU Thai) 
TIS 1 1 (TS 988) 
TIS13(IBMStd) 
TIS 15 (SIC Old) 
TIS17(SICSTD) 
TIS 18 General) 



Country 



USA-ISO 
Germany ISO 
French A ISO 
French B ISO 
Canadian 
Dutch 
Italian 
UK ISO 
Spanish 
Dan/Nor A 
Dan/Nor B 
Dan/Nor C 
Dan/Nor D 
Swed/Fin A 
Swed/Fin B 
Swed/Fin C 
Swed/Fin D 
Swiss 
Slo/Croat 
UK A 
Turkish 
Greek 
Italian ISO 
Spanish ISO 
FX: USA 
FX: France 
FX: Germany 
FX: UK 
FX: Denmark I 
FX: Sweden 
FX: Italy 
FX: Spain I 
FX: Japan 
FX: Norway 
FX: Denmark II 
FX: Spain II 
FX: Latin Amer 
FX: Netherland 
FX: Angl- 
Unvrsl 

FX: Span Amer 
FX: Portugal 
FX: Africa 
FX: 

Switzerland 
FX: Turkey 
FX: Greece 
FX: Slo/Croat 
Legal 
Korea 
None 



Select CPI 



Select LPI 



10 

12 
13.3 

15 
16.7 
17.1 

20 
XX.X User Set 



Interface 



XX User Set 



MultiSource 



Serial 



Emulation 



Filter 



Parallel 
(1284) 



Expansionl 



Expansion2 



ANSI (4800)* 
ANSI (4410) 
FX286e 
ProPrinter 
P 300/600 
DECLG 
Pseries 
DEC PPL3 
ESC/P2 



' IPDS & SCS 



Show 



Adjust TOF 



Discard 
Job 



Rolling ASCII 

1 



X 



Print at TOF 
1 



Set TOF 



Press Clr to Stop 



Software IDs 



Status Page 



_l , I 

Formats Character Set 



i 



Press Clr to Stop 



X 



Serial Parallel (1284) 

\ t I 



X 



Expansion 1 



Expansion 2 



None 
IGP 
QMS 
Hex Pass 
HexDump 



None 

IGP 

QMS 

IPDS* 

SCS* 

Hex Pass 

HexDump 



* Visible with 

IPDS & SCS 

software loaded 



5000 Series User's Manual 



I-2 



GEK-99044 



Main Menu 



Setup 



Continued Options on Page 2 



hJmz 



Stored Formats 



I 

Vertical Format 



I 



Modify Format 



Save Format 



Default 
Blank format £ 



Format 
Name 



Font Style 



Data Process 
Correspond 
Gothic NLQ 
Graphics 
Courier NLQ 
High Speed 2 
OCR-A 
OCR-B 
Italic NLQ 
High Speed 
Canadian PST 



Char Set/Country 
I ~ 



1 


USA CP 437 


Dec Nor/Dan 


Multi CP 850 


Dec Spanish 


Code Page 852 


Dec Swedish 


Code Page 853 


Dec ISO Nor/Dan 


Code Page 855 


Dec Dutch 


Code Page 858 


Dec Swiss 


Code Page 860 


Dec Portuguese 


Code Page 863 


Dec Legal 


Code Page 864 


Dec Hebrew 


Code Page 865 


Dec Hebrew Supp 


Code Page 866 


Dec ISO Lat/Heb 


Code Page 867 


Dec Katakana 


Greek CP 437 


Dec ANSI 


Dec MultiNtnl 


ISO Latin 2 


Roman 8 


ISO Latin 5 


Mozowia CP 


Greek Supp 


Turkish CP 


Turkish 7-Bit 


Greek CP 851 


Turkish 8-Bit 


Kamen 


ISO Lat/Gr Supp 


ISO-8859-1 


ISO Lat/Cy Supp 


ISO-8859-2 


PC 437 Greek 


ISO-8859-3 


PC 861 Icelandic 


ISO-8859-4 


PC 869 Greek 


ISO-8859-5 


USSR (GOST) 


ISO-8859-6 


BRASCII 


ISO-8859-7 


ABICOMP 


ISO-8859-8 


PC 857 (Turkish) 


ISO-8859-9 


ISO Latin 1T 


ISO-8859-1 5 


Bulgaria 


Dec Supp 


Code MJK (CSFR) 


Dec Tech 


Estonia 


Dec Sped Graph 


PC774 Lithuania 


Dec ISO-Latin 1 


PC 866 LAT 


Dec British 


ECMA-94-1 Mult 


Dec Finnish 


KU 42 (KU Thai) 


Dec French 


TIS 11 (TS988) 


Dec FrCanadian 


TIS13(IBMStd) 


Dec German 


TIS 15 (SIC Old) 


Dec ISO Italian 


TIS17(SICSTD) 


Dec J IS Roman 


TIS 18 General) 


None 





Country 



USA-ISO 
Germany ISO 
French A ISO 
French B ISO 
Canadian 
Dutch 
Italian 
UK ISO 
Spanish 
Dan/Nor A 
Dan/Nor B 
Dan/Nor C 
Dan/Nor D 
Swed/Fin A 
Swed/Fin B 
Swed/Fin C 
Swed/Fin D 
Swiss 
Slo/Croat 
UKA 
Turkish 
Greek 
Italian ISO 
Spanish ISO 
FX: USA 
FX: France 
FX: Germany 
FX: UK 
FX: Denmark I 
FX: Sweden 
FX: Italy 
FX: Spain I 
FX: Japan 
FX: Norway 
FX: Denmark II 
FX: Spain II 
FX: Latin Amer 
FX: Netherland 
FX: Angl-Unvrsl 
FX: Span Amer 
FX: Portugal 
FX: Africa 
FX: Switzerland 
FX: Turkey 
FX: Greece 
FX: Slo/Croat 
Legal 
Korea 
None 



LPI 

I 



Form 
Length 



10 

12 
13.3 

15 
16.7 
17.1 

20 
XX.X User Set 




By Lines 



Form Len 
Lines 



X 



By MM 
l _ 
Form Length 
MM 



Top 
Margin 



By IN 

I 

Form Length 
IN 



By IN 



nr 



X 



By MM 



Bottom 
Margin 



X 



Top Margin IN Top Margin MM 



X 



By Lines 
I Top Margin Lines I 



000 



| By IN | 



Bottom Mar IN 

— ~x~ — 



By MM 



Left 
Margin 



Right 
Margin 



Top Print 
Ref 



Left Print 
Ref 



Horiz 
Expansion 



Vert 
Expansion 



VertExp 
Options 



X1 



X8 




Print 
Options 



Slew 
Rate 



Default (top) 
Baseline 



DoubleStrike 
Emphasized 



High Speed 
Fold Over 



Normal 
Reduce 



By IN 



X 



By MM 



_l_ 



By Column 



Lft Print Ref IN 



Lft Print Ref MM 

, I , 



X 



Type Select 



Vertical Tabs 



Emulation 
VFU 



| By Lines | 
X 



By IN 



BY MM 



Vert Tabs Lines Vert Tabs IN 



Vert Tabs MM 



Clear All 
Tabs 



Left Ref Col 

— , I , — 



By MM 



By Column 

I . . 

Hor Tabs Cols I I HorTabs IN I I HorTabs MM 



By IN 

X 



Clear All 
Tabs 



X 



X 



By IN 

, 3^ , 

|Top Print Ref IN | 



X 



By MM 
Top Print Ref MM 



00.0 



=c 



I By Lines I 

I 
Top Ref Lines 



X 



000 



m 



000 



Bottom Mar MM 

~x~ 



By Lines 

^^ 

Bot Mar Lines 

~x~ 



By IN 

, \ ^ | 

Left (Right) 

Margin IN 



Left (Right) 
Margin MM 



X 



By Column 
, I 

Left (RT) 
Margin Col 



00.0 



GEK-99044 



I-3 



Appendix I. LCD Menu Maps 



Main Menu 



Setup 



Continued Options on Page 1 



I 



Continued Options on Page 3 



T 



T 

[Display Lang| 

, L_ 

English 



Multi Source 
Delay Seconds | 



InterfaceSettgs 

± 



1 



Parallel Setup 



000 I I No Fault PO& OFF 



_C 



Serial Type 

,1 
RS232 
RS422 



Expansion 1 



Serial Setup 



Expansion 2 



| Engine Options) 



EngineOff Delay 

ZCZT 



i 

Print Intensity 

J ; 



Bi-directional 

Right 

Left 



2 Seconds 
5 Seconds 
10 Seconds 
20 Seconds 



Normal 
High 



X 



X 



GenPtrOpts 



Group 1 



x 



Group 2 



X 



| Path 
Zt 
Top 
Rear 



| Retract | | Auto | 



VertMove Auto Wrap FF @ TOF 



LF = LF CR = CR FF = FF NoTabs = SPACE VM = VM Enable Enable 

LF = CR + LF CR = CR + LF FF = CR + FF NoTabs = Ignore VM = CR +VM Disable Disable 



Expansion 1 & 2 



Legacy Parallel 



Token Ring 



l/F Type 
I 



1 



l/F Straps 



DP (Short) 



X 



1 

DP (Long) 



^C 



16 MBit Speed 
4 MBit Speed 



X 



l/F Straps 
I 



6408* 
3287 



X 



Early 
Complete 



960 
1920 
2560 
3440 
3564 



Disable 
Enable 



* Only option with IPDS 



* Only visible with 

IPDS & SCS 
software loaded 



I 

IP Address 

ZJZZ 



000.000.000.000 



Router IP Addr 



X 



Frame Type 



000.000.000.000 



Ethernet 2 
802.3 



000.000.000.000 



X 



Emulation 



Buffer Size 

ZLZ 

256 
1024 



Serial 



Station Addr 

X 



1 

2 
3 

4 
5 







Protocol 








I III! 


XON/XOFF* 


CD (DTR)I CA (RTS)I SCA (SR 

1 1 — 


TS)| ETX/ACK 


I 




1 




Ready/Busy 
ON/OFFIine 

Fault 
Robust XOFF 
Robust XON 




Ready/Busy 

ON/OFFIine 

Fault 




Disable 

Immediate 

On Prn Complete 













Never 
Via CB (CTS) 



Lead Polarity 



r Only option for RS422 



|CD (DTR)| 



_l_ 



CA (RTS) 



Data 
Bits 



Stop 
Bits 



7 BITS 

8 BITS 



No Parity Bit 

Ignore 

Even 

Odd 

Space 

Mark 



I 



1 



Baud Rate High Trip Pt % 



1200 

2400 

4800 

9600 

19200 

38400 



SCA(SRTS) 



_l_ 



CB (CTS) 



|CC (DSR)| 



High 
Low 



Full 
Return 



Time I I Start Ejec 

J±7, ^^ = — 



| 00.00 | I - Timeout Only 
TOF and Timeout 



Emulation 



x 



X 



X 



X 



X 



ANSI (4800) ANSI (4410) FX286e ProPrinter P 300/600 DEC LG Pseries DEC PPL3 ESC/P2 



X 



HZ 



HZ 



zl: 



zl: 



it 



Frame Type 



Options 




802.3 

802.2 

Ethernet 2 

SNAP 



Note: A dotted ine indicates optional 

hardware/software installation required to 

view menu items. 



5000 Series User's Manual 



I-4 



GEK-99044 



Main Menu 



Setup 



Continued Options on Page 2 



Qgp] 



IGP 



BC 
Density 



I 

Low 

High 

Stagger 



Control 
Chars 



Language 



IGP 
Terminator 



Delete 
Logos 



Default 
OCR-B 



Vertical 
DPI 



Slashed 
Zero 



Clip Text 



Ignore Chr 
Mode 



| Ignore Char | 



0X5E 
0X60 
0X7C 
0X7E 
OXAA 
0XB0 
0X01 
0X21 
0X3B 
0X3F 
0X40 
0X5C 



ASCII 

German 

Swedish 

Danish 

Norwegian 

Finnish 

English 

(USA) 

Dutch 

French 

Spanish 

Italian 

Turkish 

CP850 



CR 
CRLF 



Disable 
Enable 



Disable 
Enable 



rooi 



QMS 




Language 
I 
English USA 
English (UK) 
Swedish/Finnish 
Norwegian/Dane 



Code 
V 



Free 
Format 



Slashed 
Zero 



I 

PY 
Terminator 



German 

French 

Italian 

Spanish 

PC Sub 

Verl 

CP850 



Disable 
Enable 



HZ 

CR 

CRLF 



Vertical 
DPI 



PN 
Terminator 



Magnum 
Spaces 



Ignore 
Chr Mode 



Verl 
Verll 



Disable 
Enable 



Ignore 
Char 



CR 
CRLF 



LPI Grid 

Disable 
Enable 



Note: A dotted ine indicates optional 

hardware/software installation required to 

view menu items. 



IPDS 



IPDS BC 
Density 



IPDS GR 
Density 



IBM Options 



Code 
Page 



Code Pg 
Override 



LPI 
Override 



CPI 
Override 



MPP 
Override 



MPL 
Override 



Override 
Text 



Override 
All 



037 


288 


037B 


289 


038 


297 


256 


871 


260 


420 


273 


423 


274 


424 


275 


803 


277 


870 


278 


875 


280 


880 


281 


890 


282 


905 


284 


1026 


285 


892 


286 


893 


287 


500 



Disable 
Enable 



Disable 
Enable 



Disable 
Enable 



Disable 
Enable 



Disable 
Enable 



Hex 
Print 



J—~L 



HEX 
Term 



DCF1 



L~~L" 



DCF2 

~T~ 



DCF 
Term 



Disable 
Enable 



Coax Compat * 



*COAX ONLY 
IPDS&SCS 





LOC Copy 
FF 




Interv 
Req 




Irq Bsy 
TO 



CoM 
Col 2 



NLAt 
MPP+1 



Disable 
Enable 



Enable 
Disable 



LN+2 
NL 



LC/NSCS 

NON-SCS 

LCOPY 

OFF 




Supp 
CCode 



Disable 
Enable 



LAST LF/ 
FF 



EAB 

QUERY/EAB 

Disabled 



LN1 
LN2 



CPP=1 
Anywhere 



Enable 
Disable 



3287 

3268/4214 

NON SCS 3268 

NON SCS 3287 



IPDS Im 
Density 



Enable 
Disable 



Low 
High 



IPDS 
Dens Ovr 

zzcz 

Enable 
Disable 



GEK-99044 



I-5 



Appendix I. LCD Menu Maps 



Reset to 
Deflts 



Factory 
Deflts 



USA 



International 



All Interfaces 

All Formats 

All Emulations 

Complete 



Main Menu 



Maintenance 



Alignment 



Power On Time 



Pattern 



Signature 



Amplitude 



Print Time 



Adjust Amplitude 



HHHHH-MM-SS 



Pattern 



Save Amplitude 



ClrtoStop 



Inter Gap 



Checker 
Board 



Horz Time 



Vert Time 



ClrtoStop 



Enable 



Disable 



Ribbon 
Monitor 



HeadService 



EOL Limit 



EOL 
Warning 



000M 



00M 



Dot Counts 



Print 
Chart 



00.000000000 



Clr to Stop 




Actuator Status 



Actuators 
Failed 



5000 Series User's Manual 



1-6 



GEK-99044 



25-pin RS-232C serial interface connector 2-2 

3 

36-pin CENTRONICS parallel interface connector 
2-2 



Active Format 3-3 

Actuator Status 6-6 

Adjust TOF 4-17 

Adjust Amplitude 6-3 

Alignment 6-2 

ANSI (4410) 5-38 

ANSI (4800) 5-38 

ANSI 4410 1-1 

ANSI 4800 1-1 

Appendix E. Font Print Samples E-l 

Appendix F. Flash Upgrade Instructions F-l 

Appendix G Description of Strapping Options.. G-l 

Appendix I. LCD Menu Maps 1-1 

Auto 5-36 

AutoFunct 5-69 

auto- switching power supply 2-1 

Auto Wrap 5-34 

B 

Bad Actuator 7-9. 

See Mechanical Problems. 

See Hard Faults 
Bad Wire Driver 

See Hard Faults 

Basic Pushbutton Use 2-5 

Baud Rate 5-24 

BC Density 5-43,5-49 

Beeper 2-4 

Bottom Margin 3-4, 5-6 

Buffer Overflow 

See Serial Interface Errors. 



CA(RTS) 5-19,5-21 

Case 5-64 

CB(CTS) 5-22 

CC(DSR) 5-22 

CD(DTR) 5-18, 5-21, 5-22 

Centronics 5-26 

CENTRONICS 1-1 

Change Ribbon 7-5. 

See Soft Fault Displays 

Chapter 1. Introduction 1-1 

Chapter 2. Getting Started 2-1 

Chapter 3. Operating the Printer 3-1 

Chapter 4. Using the Operator Menu 4-1 



Chapter 5. Using the Set Up Menu 5-1 

Chapter 6. Using the Maintenance Menu 6-1 

Chapter 7. Operator Care and Maintenance 7-1 

Char Set/Country 4-3 

Character Set 4-3,5-3 

CharSet/Country 5-3 

Clip Text 5-53 

Coax 5-29 

Coax Compatibility 5-63 

Code Page 5-56 

Code Pg Override 5-57 

CodeV 5-45 

column indicator label 2-19 

Comm 5-71 

Connecting the Interface Cable 2-2 

Connecting the Power Cord 2-1 

Considerations for Operation C-l 

Control Chars 5-44, 5-50 

Control Panel Initialization 2-32 

Country 4-4,5-3 

Courier NLQ 1-1 

CPI 5-4 

CPI Override 5-57 

CRatMPP+1 5-66 

D 

Data Bits 5-23 

Data Entry 2-6 

DCFTerm 5-63 

DCF1 5-61 

DCF2 5-62 

DECLG 5-40 

DEC LG and PPL3 1-1 

DECPPL3 5-41 

Default OCR-B 5-52 

Define CR 5-33 

Define FF 5-33 

Define HT 5-34 

Define LF 5-33 

Delete Logos 5-52 

Description of the Control Panel 2-3 

Direction 5-31 

Discard Job 4-18 

Display 2-5 

Display Lan 5-42 

Dot Counts 6-4 

DP(Long) 5-27 

DP(Short) 5-26 

Driver Circuit 7-9, 7-11. 

See Mechanical Problems. 
See Hard Faults 

E 

Electrical Problems 7-10 

Emulation 4-6, 5-37 



5000 Series User's Manual 



X-1 



GEK-99044 



Emulation Option descriptions G-6 

Emulation VFU 5-14 

Engine Options 5-31 

EngineOff Delay 5-31 

Epson FX286e 1-1 

ESC/P2 1-1, 5-42 

ETX/ACK 5-20 

Euro information 5-35 

Euro Information G-5 

Expansion l/Expansion2 4-9, 5-25 

Explanation of the Top Print Ref 3-5 

F 

paper B-l 

features of this printer 1-1 

FF @ TOF 5-35 

FF Before LC 5-64 

FFData 5-67 

FFEndBuff 5-68 

FFPos 5-69 

Figure 3-1 Paper Correctly Positioned Between 

Upper Tractors 3-8 

Figure 3-2b Sample Printout of Status Page 4-13 

Figure 3-4 Character Set Printout Sample 4-15 

Figure 3-5 View Pattern Sample Printout 4-17 

Figure 4-1 The Ribbon Deck 7-1 

Figure 4-2 Print Heads 7-14 

Figure 4-3 Print Head Replacement Procedure 

(1 of 3) 7-15 

Figure 4-4 Print Head Replacement Procedures 

(2 of 3) 7-16 

Figure 4-5 Print Head Replacement Procedures 

(3 of 3) 7-17 

Figure A-l Unpacking from Pallet A-l 

Figure A- 10 Shipping Package Base A-6 

Figure A-2 Straps on Box A-l 

Figure A-3 Removing Packing Material A-2 

Figure A-4 Packing Block A-2 

Figure A-5 Brackets & Screws A-3 

Figure A-7 Lifting Shipping Sleeve A-4 

Figure A-8 Removing Shipping Package A-5 

Figure A-9 Sliding Printer off Pallet A-5 

Figure B-l Sprocket Hole Details B-2 

Filter 4-7, 5-42 

Filter Combinations H-l 

Font Style 4-2, 5-2 

Form Length 3-4, 5-5 

Format 5-1 

Format Name 5-2 

Framing Error 7-13. 

See Serial Interface Errors 

Free Format 5-45 

FX286E 5-39 

G 

General Printer Options Definitions G-4 



GENPTROPTS 5-35 

Gothic NLQ 1-1 

Graphics 1-1 

H 

Hard Faults 7-8 

HeadService 6-4 

Hex 1 5-60 

Hex 2 5-61 

Hex Print 5-60 

Hex Term 5-61 

Highspeed 1-1 

High Trip Pt% 5-25 

Horiz Expansion 5-9 

Horiz Tab 5-13 

Horizontal Positioning of the Paper 2-19 

Horizontal/Vertical Tab Id Maximum Slots . H-2 

/ 

I/F Straps 5-28 

IBM Format 5-56 

IBM Proprinter III XL 1-1 

Ignore Char 5-49, 5-54 

Ignore chr mode 5-53 

Ignore Chr mode 5-48 

Ignore Mode 5-46 

IGP 5-49 

IGP Terminator 5-51 

Image Logic Fail 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 

Inhibit Xmit 5-20 

Initializing the Printer 2-32, 7-3 

Installing the Paper Handling System 

(55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Models 2-8 

Interface 4-6 

Interface Port and Filter Compatibility H-2 

Interface Settings 5-15 

Interlock circuit 2-29 

interlock switch circuit 2-30 

IntervReq 5-65 

Invalid VFU Seq 7-5. 

See Soft Fault Displays 

IPDS 5-54 

IPDS BC Density 5-55 

IPDS BC Stagger 5-54 

IPDS Dens Ovr 5-56 

IPDS GR Density 5-55 

IPDS Image Density 5-55 

Irq Bsy TO 5-66 

Irq Err TO 5-65 

Italic NLQ 1-1 

L 

Language 5-44, 5-51 

LASTLF/FF 5-69 

Lead Polarity 5-21 



5000 Series User's Manual 



X-2 



GEK-99044 



LEFT CENTER FAN 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 

LEFT FAN 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 

Left Margin 5-6 

Left Print Ref 5-9 

Legacy Parallel 5-26 

Legacy parallel Hardware strap definitions G-2 

Legacy Parallel Software Strap Definitions G-3 

LOAD position 2-15 

Loading Paper 2-14 

Loading Please Wait 

See Diagnostic Fault Codes 

LOCCopyFF 5-64 

Local Auto View Feature 3-12 

locking lever 2-20 

Low Paper 3-7 

Low Paper Printing 3-7 

Low Power 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 

LPI 5-4 

LPIGrid 5-47 

LPI Override 5-57 

M 

Magnum Spaces 5-48 

Main Menu 3-2 

Maintenance Menu 3-2 

Manual Paper Loading 2-14 

Mechanical Problems 7-11 

Menu Control 3-3 

Miscellaneous Non-Fault Messages 7-7 

Modify Format 5-2 

MPL Override 5-58 

multipart forms B-l 

MultiSource 5-15 

N 

Netware 5-30 

New Ribbon 4-1 

NLatMPP+1 5-67 

No Font 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 
No Ribbon 

See Soft Fault Displays 

Null Sup 5-68 

Number of Forms Ejected 3-9 

NVRAM Reinit 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 

O 

OCR-A 1-1 

OCR-B 1-1 

Operating Precautions iv 

Operation of the Control Panel 2-5 



Operator Cleaning Procedures 
5050/5100(50, 55 or 60 dBa) 

Cabinet Model 7-1 

5180 (52 or 55 dBa) Cabinet Model 7-2 

Operator Menu 3-2 

Operator Troubleshooting 7-3 

Options available 2-3 

Organization of this manual 1-2 

Override All 5-59 

Override MPP 5-58 

Override Text 5-59 

Oversize 1-1 

P 

P 300/600 1-1, 5-40 

Paper Almost Out 7-5. 

See Soft Fault Displays 
Paper Handling Aids (55 dBa) Cabinet Models2-l 1 
Paper Jam 

See Soft Fault Displays 
Paper Out 

See Soft Fault Displays 
Paper Path 

(5050/5100 55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model Only) 

3-9 

paper rack 2-8 

paper shelf 2-8 

Paper Specifications B-l 

Paper Tear-Off Feature 3-9 

Paper Tension Adjustment 2-28 

paper tension adjustment lever 2-15 

paper width B-l 

Parallel Setup 5-16 

Parallel(1284) 4-8 

Parity 5-23 

Parity Error 

See Serial Interface Errors 
Parts, Accessories, Consumables and Options.. D-l 

Path 5-36 

Patterns 6-2 

PN Terminator 5-47 

Power on Time 6-6 

Power-On Sequence 2-29 

Print Chart 6-5 

Print Control 5-32 

print gap wheel 2-15 

Print Head Replacement 7-21 

5050/5100(50, 55 or 60 dBa) 

Cabinet Model 7-13 

5180 (52 or 55 dBa) Cabinet Model 7-18 

Print Intensity 5-32 

Print Modifiers 5-11 

Print Options 5-11 

Print Pattern 4-18 

Print Time 6-6 

Printer Emulation vs Filter H-l 



5000 Series User's Manual 



X-3 



GEK-99044 



Printer operational Modes 3-1 

ProPrinter 5-39 

Protocol 5-17 

Pseries 1-1, 5-41 

Pushbuttons 2-5 

PY Terminator 5-46 

Q 

QMS 5-43 

Quiet Mode 5-51 

R 

Reading the Scale 2-27 

Ready 7-7. 

See Misc. Non-Fault Messages 
REAR FAN 7-9. 

See Hard Fault Displays 

Recommended Paper Weights B-l 

reinker 2-22 

reinker lever 2-22 

re-install the paper guide 2-13 

Removing a Ribbon 

(50,55, or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model 2-25 

Removing the Shipping Blocks and Hardware.. A-7 

Repacking A-6 

Replacement Procedure 7-14 

Replenishing Paper Supply 3-7 

Reset to Deflts 6-1 

Resetting Print Head Counters 7-21 

Retract 5-36 

Retracting 3-12 

ribbon cartridge 2-20 

ribbon drive knob 2-20 

Ribbon Jam 

See Soft Fault Displays. 

See Paper Tear-Off Feature 
Ribbon Removal and Installation 

5050/5100 (50,55, or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model2- 
22 

5180 (52 or 55 dBa) Cabinet Model 2-25 

Ribbon Weld 

See Soft Fault Displays 
Ribbon Weld Pass 

See Soft Fault Displays 

RibbonMonitor 6-7 

RIGHT CENTER FAN 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 
RIGHT FAN 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 

Right Margin 5-7 

RUN position 2-20 

S 

Sample Character Set 4-15 

Sample Font Page 4-15 



Sample Form Page 4-14 

Save Format 5-12 

SCA(SRS) 5-22 

SCA(SRTS) 5-19 

See Low Paper 

See Low Paperr 

Select CPI 4-4 

Select CPI (User Set) 4-4 

Select Format 4-1 

Select LPI 4-5 

Select LPI (User Set) 4-5 

Selecting the Paper Path 

5050/5100 (55 and 60 dBa) Cabinet Model Only 

2-11 

Self Test 

See Diagnostic Fault Codes. 

Self-test Error Messages 7-12 

Semiautomatic Paper Loading 2-18 

Serial 4-7,5-16 

Serial interface Errors 7-13 

Serial Setup 5-17 

Serial Type 5-16 

Service Time 7-5. 

See Soft Fault Displays 

SetTOF 4-18 

Setting the Print Gap 2-27 

Setting top of form 3-8 

Setting up a FormAT 3-3 

Setting up an Active Format 3-4 

Setup Menu 3-2 

Show 4-9 

Shuttle Error 7-12. 

See Diagnostic Fault Codes 

Shuttle Overload 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 

Slashed Zero 5-46,5-53 

Slew Rate 5-12 

Soft Faults 7-4 

Software IDs 4-10 

Special Forms 3-10 

stacking aid 2-8 

Standby 7-7. 

See Misc. Non-Fault Messages 

Status Display 3-1 

Status Page 4-11 

Stop Bits 5-24 

Striker Bar Open 

See Soft Fault Displays 
Strikr Bar Open 

See Paper Tear-Off Feature 
Supp CCode 5-70 

T 

Table 1 I/F Straps G-2 

Table 10 Printronix Pseries I/F Emulation G-8 

Table 11 Printronix P300/600 Emulation G-9 



5000 Series User's Manual 



X-4 



GEK-99044 



Table 12 Dec LG Plus Emulation G-9 

Table 13 Dec PPL3 Emulation G-10 

Table 2 I/F Straps (Software) G-3 

Table 3 Group 1 Options G-4 

Table 4 Group 2 Options G-5 

Table 5 ANSI (4800) I/F Emulation G-6 

Table 6 ANSI (4410) I/F Emulation G-6 

Table 7 Proprinter III XL I/F Emulation G-7 

Table 7-1 Soft Fault Displays 7-5 

Table 7-1 Soft Fault Displays(Cont) 7-6 

Table 7-2 7-7 

Table 7-2 Miscellaneous Non-Fault Messages... 7-7 

Table 7-3 Hard Fault Displays 7-9 

Table 7-4 7-10 

Table 7-4 Electrical Problems 7-10 

Table 7-5 7-11 

Table 7-5 Mechanical Problems 7-11 

Table 7-6 7-12 

Table 7-6 Diagnostic Fault Codes 7-12 

Table 8 EPSON FX 286e I/F Emulation G-7 

Table 9 ESC P2 I/F Emulation G-8 

Table Of Contents v 

TCP/IP 5-30 

Tearoff 7-7. 

See Misc. Non-Fault Messages 

TearOff 5-35 

Test Pattern Printing 2-33 

the horizontal paper adjustment knob 2-19 

The Ribbon Cartridge 

5050/5100 (50, 55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model2- 
22 
The Ribbon Deck 

5050/5100 (55 or 60 dBa) Cabinet Model.... 2-20 

5180 (52 or 55 dBa) Cabinet Model 2-21 

Token Ring 5-28 

Top Margin 3-4,5-5 

Top Print Ref 3-4, 5-8 

TopTearoff 7-7. 

See Misc. Non-Fault Messages 
TTMI checksum 7-12. 

See Diagnostic Fault Codes 
TTMI error 7-12. 

See Diagnostic Fault Codes 
TTMI noresp 7-12. 

See Diagnostic Fault Codes 



Twinax 5-29 

U 

UART Overflow 7-13 

Unpacking (5050/5100 55 DbA Model) 4 

Unpacking (5180 52 DbA Model) 1 

Unpacking (5180 Model) 6 

Unpacking Instructions 1 

Upgrade Flash 6-7 

Using the Keypad to Initialize 

How to Initialize the Printer 2-32 

Using the menu control Menu 3-12 

V 

VCS 5-70 

Version 5-48 

Vert Expansion 5-10 

VertExp Options 5-10 

Vertical DPI 5-47, 5-52 

Vertical Format 5-13 

Vertical Tabs 5-14 

VertMove 5-34 

VFU Fmt Inactive 7-9. 

See Hard Faults 
VFU Missing TOF 

See Soft Fault Displays. See 
VFU PI Lead 7-5. 

See Soft Fault Displays 
VFU Tbl Too Long 7-5. 

See Soft Fault Displays 

View Pattern 4-17 

Viewing 3-12 

W 

When to Initialize 2-32 

wickets 2-8 

Wire Paper Guide 2-12 

X 

XON/XOFF 5-17 

Y 

yellow spool knob 2-22 



5000 Series User's Manual 



X-5 



GEK-99044